SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Always read these precautions before using this product.)

Before using the product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with only this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

DANGER
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in death or severe injury.

CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

Note that the CAUTION level may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances.
Always follow the precautions of both levels as they are important for personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[Design precautions]
DANGER
Before performing the test operation, read this manual carefully to understand the operation
procedure.
Incorrect output or malfunctions may cause an accident.
When the security of the GOT and relevant information need to be protected against illegal access
from an external device via the Internet, take measures at the user's discretion.
Failure to do so may cause the configured information to be read out illegally.

A-1
REVISION
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print date * Manual number Revision
Nov., 2006 SH(NA)-080654ENG-A First edition
Feb., 2007 SH(NA)-080654ENG-B Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.47Z

Partial additions
Section 3.3, Section 3.4.1, Section 3.4.2, Section 7.2, Section 7.2.5

Partial corrections
Section 1.2, 2.3, 2.4.2, 2.5, 3.1, 5.3, 6.5, 6.5.1, 6.5.2, 6.6.1, 6.7, 6.7.1, 6.8, 6.8.1,
6.8.2, 6.9, 6.9.2, 6.10, 7.6, 7.8.1, 8.2.2, Section 6.10.1 to 6.10.5

Additions
Section 5.1.5, Section 6.10.6, Appendix 5
Section 5.1.5 to 5.1.8 Section 5.16 to 5.1.9
May, 2007 SH(NA)-080654ENG-C Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.58L

Partial additions
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS, Section 2.1.1, 2.4.2, 3.1, 3.2,
5.3, 6.6.1, 6.8.1, 6.10.3, 6.10.4, 7.2, 8.2, Appendix 5, 6, INDEX
Partial corrections
Section 6.5, 6.11.2, Appendix 2
Aug., 2007 SH(NA)-080654ENG-D Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.63R

Partial additions
Section 2.1.1
Partial corrections
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS, Section 4.1, App. 5
Dec., 2007 SH(NA)-080654ENG-E Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.73B

Partial additions
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS, Section 3.1, 3.3, 6.5.1, 6.6.1,
6.8, 6.11.2, 7.8

Partial additions
Section 5.1.6, 5.1.9, 6.7.1 to 6.7.3, 6.7.5, 6.8.1, 6.8.2, 6.9.2, 7.5, 7.8.1, 7.8.2

Additions
Section 6.5.2
Section 6.5.2 Section 6.5.3

Feb., 2008 SH(NA)-080654ENG-F Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.77F

Partial additions
Section 2.2.1, 6.8.1, 8.1

A -2
 * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print date * Manual number Revision
Jun., 2008 SH(NA)-080654ENG-G Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.82L
Partial additions
Section 2.4.2, 3.1, 3.3, 5.1.1, 6.5.1, 6.5.3, 6.7.1, 6.8, 7.2, 8.2.1, 8.2.2

Additions
Section 5.1.8, Section 6.8.3, Appendix 3
Section 5.1.8 to 5.1.9 Section 5.1.9 to 5.1.10,
Appendix 4 to 5 Appendix 5 to 6
Oct., 2008 SH(NA)-080654ENG-H Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.90U

Partial additions
Section 1.1, 2.3, 2.5, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 5.1.10, 6.7.1, 6.7.6, 6.9.2, 6.11.2, 8.1, 8.1.1,
8.2.1

Partial additions
Chapter 1, Section 2.2.1, 2.3, App.6
Dec., 2008 SH(NA)-080654ENG-I Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.91V
Partial corrections
Section 2.2.1, 6.9.1

Japanese Manual Version SH-080625-L

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Also,
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may
occur as a result of using the contents in this manual.

2006 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A-3
CAUTIONS FOR USE

Cautions on the system configuration

(1) GOTs that support the MES interface function

GT16 and GT15 only support the function.
By installing the option OS into a GOT from GT Designer2, the MES interface function
can be used.
For applicable models, refer to the following:
Section 2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers

(2) Option function board that supports the MES interface function
For the option function board that supports the MES interface function, refer to the fol-
lowing:
Section 2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS

(3) Relational databases that support the MES interface function

For the relational databases that support the MES interface function, refer to the fol-
lowing:
Section 2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer)

(4) Connection type used for the MES interface function

To utilize the MES interface function, the Ethernet connection is used.
Install an Ethernet communication unit, and configure the Ethernet setting in Commu-
nication Settings of GT Designer2.
For applicable Ethernet communication units, refer to the following:
Section 2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS
For the Ethernet connection, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

A -4
 INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT).
Before using the GOT, please read this manual carefully to understand the features and performance for
correct handling.

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................................................A - 1

REVISION .........................................................................................................................................................A - 2
CAUTIONS FOR USE...................................................................................................................................... A - 4
ABOUT MANUALS .......................................................................................................................................... A - 9
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS................................................................................................... A - 10
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL .................................................................................................................... A - 14
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS ........................................................................................ A - 15

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 - 1 to 1 - 7
1.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2
1.2 What is the MES Interface Function? .............................................................................................. 1 - 7

CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 - 1 to 2 - 11

2.1 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.1.1 Overall system configuration .................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.1.2 System configuration when installing software used for the MES Interface Function .............. 2 - 2
2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers...................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.2.1 Connection type used for the MES Interface Function ............................................................. 2 - 3
2.2.2 Precautions for inverter or servo amplifier connection ............................................................. 2 - 5
2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS ............................................................................... 2 - 6
2.4 Operating Environment.................................................................................................................... 2 - 8
2.4.1 Configuration computer ............................................................................................................ 2 - 8
2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer) ............................................................................... 2 - 9
2.5 Cautions on System Configuration ................................................................................................ 2 - 11

CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 1 to 3 - 8
3.1 Performance Specifications ............................................................................................................. 3 - 1
3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function.................................................................. 3 - 3
3.3 Function List and Setting Item List................................................................................................... 3 - 4
3.4 GOT Internal Device (GS) ............................................................................................................... 3 - 6
3.4.1 GOT internal device list ............................................................................................................ 3 - 6
3.4.2 MES Interface Function area.................................................................................................... 3 - 6

CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE USE OF THE MES INTERFACE

FUNCTION 4 - 1 to 4 - 4
4.1 Settings and Procedures before Use of the MES Interface Function .............................................. 4 - 1

A-5
 4.2 Installation and Uninstallation .......................................................................................................... 4 - 4

CHAPTER 5 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION 5 - 1 to 5 - 26

5.1 DB Interface Function ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 1
5.1.1 DB interface function operation ................................................................................................ 5 - 1
5.1.2 Job execution procedure .......................................................................................................... 5 - 2
5.1.3 Tag function .............................................................................................................................. 5 - 3
5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function ....................................................................................................... 5 - 4
5.1.5 Trigger buffering function.......................................................................................................... 5 - 6
5.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)........................................................................ 5 - 9
5.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action) .................................................................. 5 - 10
5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action).................................................... 5 - 11
5.1.9 Program execution function .................................................................................................... 5 - 14
5.1.10 DB buffering function .............................................................................................................. 5 - 15
5.2 SNTP Time Synchronization Function ........................................................................................... 5 - 23
5.3 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 5 - 24

CHAPTER 6 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION SETTING 6 - 1 to 6 - 110

6.1 MES Interface Function Setting Screen........................................................................................... 6 - 1
6.2 Displaying the MES Interface Function Setting Screen ................................................................... 6 - 1
6.3 Screen Structure .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 2
6.3.1 Screen structure ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree......................................................................................... 6 - 3
6.4 Setting.............................................................................................................................................. 6 - 5
6.5 Device Tag Settings......................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.5.1 Setting items in Device tag settings.......................................................................................... 6 - 7
6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting .................................................................................................... 6 - 9
6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting ........................................................................................ 6 - 11
6.6 Server Service Settings ................................................................................................................. 6 - 17
6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings.................................................................................. 6 - 18
6.7 Job Settings ................................................................................................................................... 6 - 21
6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings ................................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions.......................................................................................... 6 - 26
6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution ........................................................................................ 6 - 35
6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering.................................................................................................. 6 - 38
6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution .............................................. 6 - 39
6.7.6 One-shot execution................................................................................................................. 6 - 40
6.8 Job Settings - Actions .................................................................................................................... 6 - 42
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action................................................................................... 6 - 46
6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action............................................................................................ 6 - 68
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action............................................................................... 6 - 72
6.9 Option Setting ................................................................................................................................ 6 - 85
6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting ............................................................... 6 - 86
6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings..................................................................................... 6 - 88
6.10 Diagnosis ....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 92
6.10.1 Checking the MES Interface Function status (Status) ............................................................ 6 - 93

A-6
 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation) ................................................. 6 - 94
6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change job status) ......................................................................... 6 - 95
6.10.4 Checking the connection of the previous job execution (Connection result of previous job
execution) ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 97
6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)............................................................... 6 - 98
6.10.6 Checking the trigger buffering (Trigger buffering status) ........................................................ 6 - 99
6.11 Working Log................................................................................................................................. 6 - 100
6.11.1 MES Interface Execute Log.................................................................................................. 6 - 101
6.11.2 Job Execute Log................................................................................................................... 6 - 102
6.12 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 6 - 107

CHAPTER 7 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 - 1 to 7 - 25

7.1 DB Connection Service Functions ................................................................................................... 7 - 1
7.2 Setting ODBC of Database.............................................................................................................. 7 - 4
7.3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool ................................................................................ 7 - 12
7.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool ............................................................. 7 - 13
7.4.1 Screen structure ..................................................................................................................... 7 - 13
7.4.2 Menu configuration ................................................................................................................. 7 - 14
7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool .................................................................. 7 - 15
7.6 Importing/Exporting Files .............................................................................................................. 7 - 20
7.7 Help ............................................................................................................................................... 7 - 21
7.8 Output Log Specifications.............................................................................................................. 7 - 22
7.8.1 Access log .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 23
7.8.2 SQL failure log ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 25

CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 - 1 to 8 - 18
8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method ............................................................................................. 8 - 1
8.1.1 MES Interface Function setting ................................................................................................ 8 - 3
8.1.2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool .................................................................... 8 - 5
8.2 Error Code List................................................................................................................................. 8 - 6
8.2.1 Error log in the Working log ...................................................................................................... 8 - 6
8.2.2 DB Connection Service .......................................................................................................... 8 - 10

APPENDICES App - 1 to App - 18

Appendix 1 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables by Setting Items ............................................. App - 1
Appendix 1.1 ASCII code table .........................................................................................................App - 1
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable names, etc. ........App - 2
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants, etc............................................. App - 3
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc. ............................................. App - 3
Appendix 2 About Monitoring Interval Timeout....................................................................................... App - 4
Appendix 3 Warning Messages in Windows Vista(R) ............................................................................App - 7
Appendix 3.1 Overview of warning messages ..................................................................................App - 7
Appendix 3.2 Methods for disabling warning messages ................................................................... App - 7
Appendix 4 Tables for Used Terms ......................................................................................................App - 13
Appendix 5 Application Example of MES Interface Function ...............................................................App - 14

A-7
 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by MES Interface Function Version Upgrade..............................App - 17

INDEX Index - 1 to Index - 2

A-8
ABOUT MANUALS

The following related mauals are available.

Please obtain the manuals if necessary.

Manual number
Manual name
(Model code)
GT16 User's Manual
-Describes the GT16 hardware-relevant contents, including the specifications, part names, mounting, power
SH-080978ENG
supply wiring, external dimensions, and option devices.
(1D7M88)
-Describes the GT16 functions, including the utility.
(Sold separately)
GT15 User's Manual
-Describes the GT15 hardware-relevant contents, including the specifications, part names, mounting, power
SH-080528ENG
supply wiring, external dimensions, and option devices.
(1D7M23)
-Describes the GT15 functions, including the utility.
(Sold separately)
GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (For GOT1000 Series)
Describes the GT Designer2 installation procedure, basic operations for drawing, and how to transfer data to the SH-080529ENG
GOT1000 series. (1D7M24)
(Sold separately)*1
GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 1/3
GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 2/3
SH-080530ENG
GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 3/3
Describe the specifications and setting details of each object function used in the GOT1000 series. (1D7M25)
(Sold separately)*1
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1/3
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 2/3
SH-080532ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 3/3
Describe the system configurations available for the GOT1000 series and how to produce cables. (1D7M26)
(Sold separately)*1
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual
SH-080545ENG
Describes the gateway function specifications, system configurations, and setting method.
(1D7M33)
(Sold separately)*1

*1 The manual data in PDF format are included in the product of GT Works2 or GT Designer2.

A -9
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS

Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows:

GOT

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD

GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD

GT16 , GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685

GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD

GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD

GT1585
GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD

GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD

GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD

GT157 GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT1575-VN Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD

GT1572-VN Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD

GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD

GT156
GT1562-VN Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD

GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD

GT155 GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

GOT1000 Series
GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD

GT15 , GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155

Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,

GT1155-Q
GT115 GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD

GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD

Handy GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD

GOT GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD

GT11 , GT11 Abbreviation of GT1155-Q, GT1150-Q, GT11 Handy GOT

GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD

GT105
GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD

GT1045-Q Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD

GT104
GT1040-Q Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD

GT1030 Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2

Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW,

GT1020
GT1020-LBDW2, GT1020-LBLW

GT10 , GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020

GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series

GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 series

A - 10
Communication unit

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2,

Bus connection unit
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P

Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2

CC-Link IE controller network communication

GT15-J71GP23-SX
unit

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M

Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S

*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

*2 A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set
*3 A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set

Option unit

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB unit
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR
CF card unit GT15-CFCD

CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET

External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT
Fingerprint unit GT15-80FPA

*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.

A - 11
 Option
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
Memory card CF card
GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC
GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,
Option function board
GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT15-MESB48M, GT11-50FNB
Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT
GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW,
For GT16 GT16-90PSGW, GT16-80PSCB, GT16-80PSGB,
GT16-80PSCW, GT16-80PSGW
GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW,
GT15-90PSGW, GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB,
GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW, GT15-70PSCB,
For GT15 GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,
GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW,
GT15-60PSGW, GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB,
Protective Sheet
GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW
GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW,
For GT11
GT11-50PSGW, GT11H-50PSC
GT10-50PSCB, GT10-50PSGB, GT10-50PSCW,
GT10-50PSGW, GT10-40PSCB, GT10-40PSGB,
GT10-40PSCW, GT10-40PSGW, GT10-30PSCB,
For GT10
GT10-30PSGB, GT10-30PSCW, GT10-30PSGW,
GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW,
GT10-20PSGW
GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO,
Protective cover for oil
GT05-50PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT11-50UCOV
GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND,
Stand
GT05-50STAND
GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT,
Backlight GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT,
GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB
Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S
Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV
Memory loader GT10-LDR
Memory board GT10-50FMB

Software
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT Works2 Version SW D5C-GTWK2-E, SW D5C-GTWK2-EV
GT Designer2 Version SW D5C-GTD2-E, SW D5C-GTD2-EV
GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Simulator2 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator 2 for GOT1000 / GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000
GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2
GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
GX Simulator
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
Document Converter Abbreviation of document data conversion software Document Converter for GOT1000 series
PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control

A - 12
License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

License GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P

License key (for GT SoftGOT2)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

License key A9GTSOFT-LKEY-P (For DOS/V PC)

License key FD SW5D5F-SGLKEY-J (For PC CPU module)

Others
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
OMRON PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Sharp Corporation
JTEKT PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by JTEKT Corporation
TOSHIBA PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI FA PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
MATSUSHITA PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
YASKAWA PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley PLC manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE FANUC PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by GE Fanuc Automation Corporation
LS IS PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
SCHNEIDER PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Schneider Electric SA
SIEMENS PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Siemens AG
OMRON temperature
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by OMRON Corporation
controller
SHINKO indicating
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
controller
CHINO controller Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION
FUJI SYS temperature
Temperature Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd.
controller
controller
YAMATAKE temperature
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yamatake Corporation
controller
YOKOGAWA temperature
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
controller
RKC temperature
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
controller
PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function

Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

Windows font
(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer2)
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are
Intelligent function module
mounted to the base unit.

Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP
MODBUS /TCP
network.

A - 13
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

The following symbols are used in this manual.

Display reference ahead Display of chapter finding

Referring ahead and the
reference manual have The chapter on the page which is the
been described by the opening in the index at the right of the
finger mark. page is understood at one view.

Display of section and subsection title

The section and the sebsection on the
open page are understood at one view.

The figure above is for explanation purposes only, and therefore differs from the actual
pages.
There are also the following types of explanations.

Point
Provides cautions or useful functions in addition to the page descriptions.

Remark
Gives references related to the contents explained on the page, or useful informa-
tion.

A - 14
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS

The following table shows the definitions and descriptions of the terms used in this
manual.

Term Description
Tag for Wonderware
Name for data unit in the data base Wonderware Historian.
Historian
Abbreviation for Manufacturing Execution System
The system that controls and monitors the plant status in real time to optimize production
MES activities
This enables speed-up of the responses to production plans and status changes and efficient
production operation, optimizing the production activities.
Abbreviation for Open Database Connectivity
ODBC
Standard specifications for software to access databases
Abbreviation for Simple Network Time Protocol
SNTP
Protocol for synchronizing the time of computers via a TCP/IP network
Computer that provides time information to the GOT
SNTP server computer
This can be shared with a server computer.
Abbreviation for Structured Query Language
SQL
Data manipulation language and used for relational database operations
UTF-8 Method for converting character strings defined in Unicode into byte strings (Number strings)
Abbreviation for eXtensible Markup Language
XML
Markup language for describing documentation, data meanings, and structures
Account Represents the right to use a GOT or a server computer, or an ID necessary for its use.
The unit for processing defined in the job. The unit for processing includes [Communication
action] and [Transmit resource action] for communicating with a database, and [Operation
action] for operating tag component values.
[Communication action] is a processing unit for sending one SQL text (Select, Update, Insert,
Action
MultiSelect).
[Transmit resource action] is the processing unit for sending each SQL text (Insert) for records
in one resource data collected in the GOT.
Up to 20 dyadic operations can be defined for [Operation action].
One of the server computers, which communicates by the MES interface function to run
Application server computer programs
A database computer can be shared as an application server computer.
COMMIT Processing that makes a permanent change to databases
Generic term for the services that a server computer to which the DB Connection Service is
installed can offer.
Server service There are database server service and application server service.
Database server service is a service for accessing a database.
Application server service is a service for linking with a program.
Generic term for database server computers and application server computers
Server computer
This computer can be shared as an SNTP server computer.
Job A set of processings executed by a preset trigger
A personal computer that runs GT Designer2
This is used to install the option OS into a GOT, to configure the Communication Settings,
Configuration computer
screens and MES interface function settings, and to download projects to the GOT.
This can be shared as a server computer.

(To the next page)

A - 15
 (From the previous page)

Term Description
Standard time zone for each region of the world
Each nation uses the time difference (within 12 hours) from the time at the Greenwich
Observatory in the United Kingdom (GMT) as the standard time. The region using the same
Time zone time difference is called a time zone.
The standard time for Japan is 9 hours ahead of the GMT.
Some nations adopt daylight-saving time in summer season in which clocks are set one hour
ahead of the standard time.
Generic term for components (Device data) making up a device tag (Tag)
Tag component
A set of data that contains the information on the GOT's internal devices, and the data type
(Component)
and devices required for access to the gateway devices
Connection information necessary for accessing data using ODBC
With Windows , a data source name is assigned to connection information for manegement.
Data source
The database can be accessed via ODBC by specifying the data source name in the MES
interface function.
Database (DB) Data management method that follows relational data model logic
or One data is expressed as a collection of multiple items (Fields) and the data collection is
Relational expressed as a table.
database (RDB) Data can be easily merged and selected using key data.
One of the server computers, on which the database communicating with the GOT is run
Database computer
when the MES interface function is used.
Data management format managed with relational databases
Table
It is a two-dimensional table format composed of rows and columns.
Variety of memory data that each controller internally contains.
Device
There are devices handled in units of bits and those handled in units of words.
Data table that contains a set of information (Components) required to access the device data
Device tag (Tag)
in the GOT
Unit that multiple databases related to each other can be correctly processed all at once.
Processing managed as transaction is either correctly completed or canceled with the
Transaction
rollback. Each database is processed by the action, and each transaction is processed by the
job with the MES interface function.
Trigger conditions Startup conditions for job operation
When too many trigger conditions (data transmission conditions) are met simultaneously, this
function allows the system to buffer the data and the time that trigger conditions are met to the
user area. The action (operation and transmission of the data) for the buffered data is
Trigger buffering
executed later.
Even when the data transmission triggers are activated frequently, no triggers are missed so
that all the jobs are executed.
This function allows the system to temporarily store SQL texts that failed to be sent due to a
DB buffering
communication error in a CF card and to resend the texts upon recovery.
A constant exchange of signals between the sending and receiving ends to achieve high
Handshake
reliability
Corresponds to a column in a relational database and indicates a type of data (Record
Field
attribute).
Variable (Temporary Variable that can be used in the same job when temporarily storing values selected from a
variable) database or when writing operation values to a database or tag components.
Corresponds to a row in a relational database. One row (Record) stores the values of multiple
Record
columns (Fields).
Rollback Processing for canceling changes to a database

A - 16
 1
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW

OVERVIEW
The MES interface function allows SQL text transmission from a GOT to a database in the
server computer connected via the Ethernet, enabling writing GOT's device values to the
database and reading database values to set them to GOT's devices.
This direct communication with the server computer eliminates the need for gateway
2
equipment, realizing reduction in the maintenance cost and improvement in reliability.

CONFIGURATION
Point

SYSTEM
The MES interface function is available only for GT16 and GT15.

3
When not using MES interface function When using MES interface function

SPECIFICATIONS
Server (Database) Server (Database)

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Communication gateway SQL No gateway required

5
GOT GOT

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Controller Controller
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

1-1
 1.1 Features

This section explains the features of the MES interface function.

(1) Simple setting enables connection to the information system without

programming.
Access to information system databases can be realized simply by making the
necessary settings with the setting tool.
Since there is no need to create programs for generating SQL texts, the engineering
costs for system construction and the work period can be reduced.

1-2 1.1 Features

 1
(2) Important data can be protected.

OVERVIEW
(a) Buffering of send data (SQL text) during a communication error
When an error occurs during communications with a database, the SQL texts
failed to be sent can be buffered in the GOT.
After recovery, the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database. 2
(Manual operation is also possible.)

CONFIGURATION
Disconnected

SYSTEM
Database

INSERT
3

SPECIFICATIONS
INSERT
INSERT
UPDATE

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

CF card

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Recovered

Resend
Database
5
INSERT

MES INTERFACE
INSERT

FUNCTION
INSERT
UPDATE

FUNCTION SETTING
CF card

MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

1.1 Features 1-3

 (b) Obtaining logs in the event of access errors
After connection to a database, if a communication error occurs, the error details
can be recorded as a log on the database side.
Analyzing the log is useful for data protection and error analysis.

Database

DB connection service

Access
log
SQL failure
log

(3) The information system load can be reduced.

Data can be monitored on the GOT and when the conditions are met, the data can be
sent to the information system.
This can reduce the information system load, compared to the case of the
conventional system that constantly samples and monitors data.

[With the MES interface function]

<Information system>

Data transmission only when needed

Conditions met Database

[Conventional system]

<Information system>

Database

Constant sampling/monitoring from

information system is required.

1-4 1.1 Features

 1

(4) Access independent of the database table configuration is possible.

OVERVIEW
Freely designed database tables can be used for access to databases.
The MES interface function offers not only the high flexibility in designing a new
system but also the capability of reconstructing the existing system without changing
the database tables. 2

CONFIGURATION
(5) Various controller information can be stored and changed in the database.
Controllers can be connected in a variety of topologies and their information can be

SYSTEM
stored into a database via GOT devices.
Also, data read out from the database can be set to controllers as parameters via
GOT devices. 3

SPECIFICATIONS
PLC
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Inverter

<MES interface function>

Data transmission 5
Status monitoring function
Script function Database

MES INTERFACE
Gateway function

FUNCTION
Servo
Data query

FUNCTION SETTING
Microcomputer
MES INTERFACE

7
Barcode reader
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

1.1 Features 1-5

 (6) Other features
(a) Reducing setting mistakes by use of tag names
Tag names can be assigned to devices.
Assigning recognizable tag names can reduce setting mistakes.

(b) Obtaining the exact time by time synchronization

By periodically obtaining the time from the SNTP server and updating the time of
the GOT, the correct time can be ensured.

(c) Supporting system construction

The diagnostic function allows checking the operating status of the MES interface
function (in real time, log).
Modification of the job status and test operation of a project under design is also
possible.

1-6 1.1 Features

 1
1.2 What is the MES Interface Function?

OVERVIEW
The items listed below are used with the MES interface function.
For equipment required for the MES interface function, refer to the following:
Section 2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS
2
Reference
Item Description
section

CONFIGURATION
Option OS (MES Interface) The option OS that runs on a GOT to realize the MES interface function. Chapter 5
MES interface function
This function allows the MES interface function setting in GT Designer2. Chapter 6

SYSTEM
setting
Software that runs on the server computer and links databases with the GOT.
DB Connection Service Chapter 7
Installed from the CD-ROM of GTWorks2/GT Designer2.
Software that runs on the server computer and changes the settings of the DB
3
DB Connection Service
Connection Service. Chapter 7
Setting Tool
Installed from the CD-ROM of GTWorks2/GT Designer2.

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

1.2 What is the MES Interface Function? 1-7

CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

This chapter explains the system configuration available for the MES interface function.

2.1 System Configuration

2.1.1 Overall system configuration

This section shows the overall system configuration when using the MES interface
function.

Oracle , SQL Server

Database (Third party product)

SNTP server computer*1 Server computer

DB Connection Service
DB Connection Service Setting Tool

Ethernet

Install Configuration computer*1

USB*3 GT Designer2
* MES interface function
* Option OS
GOT Download

MELSECNET/H, etc.*2

*1 The SNTP server computer and configuration computer can be shared as the server computer.
*2 For controllers available for the MES interface function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
*3 RS-232 or Ethernet connection is also available.
However, in Ethernet connection, the option OS cannot be installed.

2-1 2.1 System Configuration

2.1.1 Overall system configuration
 1
2.1.2 System configuration when installing software used for the MES
Interface Function

OVERVIEW
The following shows system configuration when installing software used for the MES
interface function.
2
(1) When installing the DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service
Setting Tool on a server computer

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
GT Works2 Sever computer
GT Designer2

Install
3

SPECIFICATIONS
DB Connection Service
DB Connection Service Setting Tool Commercial product

Point 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

(1) When installing DB Connection Service on a database server computer, the

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
ODBC setting for the database used must be made beforehand.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
(2) When installing DB Connection Service on an application server computer, an
account for user program execution must be created beforehand.
5
(2) When installing GT Designer2 on a configuration computer

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
GT Works2 Configuration computer
GT Designer2

Install
6

FUNCTION SETTING
GT Designer2
Commercial product MES INTERFACE

(3) When installing Option OS (MES Interface) on the GOT

Computer
7
Option OS
GOT
DB CONNECTION

(MES interface)
SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Install*1

GT Designer2
+
MES interface function 8
TROUBLESHOOTING

Commercial product

*1 For equipment used for installation, refer to the following manual:

GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual

2.1 System Configuration

2.1.2 System configuration when installing software used for the MES Interface Function
2-2
 2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers

2.2.1 Connection type used for the MES Interface Function

The following table shows the GOT supporting the MES interface function and availability
in each connection type.
For system configuration when using the MES interface function, refer to the following
manual:
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
: Applicable : Partly restricted : Not applicable
Connection type GT16/GT15
Bus connection
Direct CPU connection
Computer link connection
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
Mitsubishi PLC *4 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC *1
connection network)
CC-Link IE controller network connection
CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) *2

CC-Link connection (via G4)

Ethernet connection*7
Serial connection
Third party PLC
Ethernet connection*7
connection
MODBUS /TCP connection
Microcomputer connection
Temperature controller connection
Inverter connection *3

Servo amplifier connection *3

Robot controller connection*5

Direct CPU connection
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC *1
CNC connection *6 network)
CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) *2

*7
Ethernet connection

*1 For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use the MELSECNET/H communication unit.

The MELSECNET/10 communication unit cannot be used.
*2 For the CC-Link connection, use the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).
The CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BR13-Z) cannot be used.
*3 For the inverter or servo amplifier connection, use the status observation function or the script
function to assign devices.
For how to assign devices, refer to the following:
Section 2.2.2 Precautions for inverter or servo amplifier connection
*4 Including connection to the motion controller CPU (Q series and A series), CNC C70, and CRnQ-
700
*5 Applicable to the CRnD-700 only. For the CRnQ-700, refer to the above Mitsubishi PLC
connection.
*6 Applicable to the MELDAS C6/C64 only. For the CNC C70, refer to the above Mitsubishi PLC
connection.
*7 For connecting GT16 to a device supporting 10BASE(-T/2/5), configure the network that supports
both 10Mbps and 100Mbps communication speeds by using a switching hub.

2-3 2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers

2.2.1 Connection type used for the MES Interface Function
 1

Remark

OVERVIEW
Connection type examples for the case where the MES interface function cannot
be used
(Example 1) When using GT11
Because the Ethernet communication unit is not mountable, the MES interface 2
function cannot be used.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
GT11 Ethernet communication
unit
3

SPECIFICATIONS
(Example 2) When using GT15
Since the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BR13-Z) is not mountable
concurrently together with the Ethernet communication unit, the MES interface
function cannot be used.
To utilize both of them concurrently, use another type of the CC-Link 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
CC-Link communication unit
(GT15-75J61BR13-Z)
5
GT15

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Ethernet communication
unit

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers

2.2.1 Connection type used for the MES Interface Function
2-4
 2.2.2 Precautions for inverter or servo amplifier connection

In the inverter or servo amplifier connection, the status observation function or the script
function must be used for device assignment.
For the status observation function and the script function, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
The following are device assignment examples.
Example 1) Setting for assigning devices of the inverter [FREQROL 500/700 Series] to
the GOT's internal devices using the status observation function

Example 2) Setting for assigning devices of the inverter [FREQROL 500/700 Series] to
the GOT's internal devices using the status observation function

Setting item Setting content Remarks

Trigger ON Device GB40 Ordinary (GB40 is always ON.)
Assigns devices A0 to A15 of the inverter
[w:GD0]=[0-0:w:A0]; that has channel No. 1 and station No. 0 to
device GD0.
Assigns devices Pr 0 to Pr 15 of the inverter
[w:GD10]=[0-0:w:Pr0]; that has channel No. 1 and station No. 0 to
device GD 10.
Operation device
Assigns devices PG0 to PG15 of the inverter
[w:GD20]=[0-0:w:PG0]; that has channel No.1 and station No.0 to
device GD20.
Assigns devices A0 to A15 of the inverter that
[w:GD31600]=[@3:0-16:w:A0]; has channel No.3 and station No.16 to device
GD31600.

2-5 2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers

2.2.2 Precautions for inverter or servo amplifier connection
 1
2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS

OVERVIEW
(1) Required equipment and software
The following table lists the equipment and software required for use of the MES
interface function.
2
(a) GT16
Application Required equipment/software Module name

CONFIGURATION
Executing the MES interface function on the GOT Option function board GT16-MESB
Connecting the GOT to Ethernet Built-in Ethernet interface -

SYSTEM
Connecting the GOT to controllers GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
Setting the MES interface GT Designer2 Version2.90U or later
function (MES interface function)
- 3
Setting the MES interface GT15-MEM-128MC
DB buffering function,
function GT15-MEM-256MC

SPECIFICATIONS
log output function, CF card
Commercially available CF card
diagnostics function
(128MB to 2GB)*1

*1 Some models have been concluded by Mitsubishi to be applicable.

For the applicable models, refer to "List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-D-
001). 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

The above TECHNICAL BULLETIN can be viewed at the Information site for Mitsubishi Electric

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

Industrial Automation products, MELFANSweb.

INTERFACE FUNCTION
(MELFANSweb site: http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/melfansweb)

For installation of the required equipment, refer to the following manual.

GT16 User's Manual
For connection of the required equipment, refer to the following manual. 5
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

MES INTERFACE
(b) GT15

FUNCTION
Application Required equipment/software Module name
Executing the MES interface function on the GOT Option function board GT15-MESB48M
Connecting the GOT to Ethernet Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100 6
Connecting the GOT to controllers GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

FUNCTION SETTING
Setting the MES interface GT Designer2 Version2.43V or later
- MES INTERFACE
function (MES interface function)
Setting the MES interface GT15-MEM-128MC
DB buffering function,
function GT15-MEM-256MC
log output function, CF card
Commercially available CF card
diagnostics function
(128MB to 2GB)*1 7
*1 Some models have been concluded by Mitsubishi to be applicable.
DB CONNECTION

For the applicable models, refer to "List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-D-
SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

001).
The above TECHNICAL BULLETIN can be viewed at the Information site for Mitsubishi Electric
Industrial Automation products, MELFANSweb.
(MELFANSweb site: http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/melfansweb)
8
For installation of the required equipment, refer to the following manual.
TROUBLESHOOTING

GT15 User's Manual

For connection of the required equipment, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS 2-6

 (2) Required option OS
The following shows the option OS required for use of the MES interface function.

Application OS name
MES interface function MES Interface
For installation of the required option OS, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (8.
TRANSFERRING DATA)

2-7 2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS

 1
2.4 Operating Environment

OVERVIEW
2.4.1 Configuration computer

The following is the operating environment for the configuration computer. 2

Items other than the shown item for the MES interface function are identical to those for
GT Designer2.

CONFIGURATION
For the operating environment for GT Designer2, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual

SYSTEM
Item Description
Display Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels or higher
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

2.4 Operating Environment

2.4.1 Configuration computer
2-8
 2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer)

This section explains the operating environment for the server computer.
Item Description
Personal computer A PC/AT-compatible computer on which the following operating systems can run
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System (English version)*1*3*4
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System (English version)*2*3
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System (English version)*1*3*4
OS Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Operating System (English version)*2*3
Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System (English version)*1*3*4*10*11
Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System (English version)*1*3*4*10*11
Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System (English version)*1*3*4*10*11
Computer A PC/AT-compatible computer on which the following operating systems can run
CPU
Required See "Performance required for personal computer and operating system to be used" below.
memory
Free hard disk space 64MB or more (After database installation)
Disk drive CD-ROM disk drive
Display A display where the above OS and after-mentioned databases can run
Interface Ethernet
When using the DB interface function: Relational database (any of the following)
• Oracle 8i Standard Edition
• Oracle 9i Standard Edition
• Oracle 10g Standard Edition
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition*5
• Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition
Required software • Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine(MSDE 2000)*5
• Microsoft Access 2000*6*7
• Microsoft Access 2003*6*7
• Microsoft Access 2007*5*6*12*13
• Wonderware Historian 9.0*8*9
When using the SNTP time synchronization function: SNTP server
(Equipped as a standard to Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003)
Others The mouse, keyboard, and CD-ROM driver must be compatible with the above OS.
*1 Only the 32-bit OS is available.
*2 When using Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2000 Professional, ServicePack2 or later is
required.
*3 To install or operate DB Connection Service or DB Connection Service Setting Tool, the
administrator authority is required.
*4 The following functions are not available.
If any of the following functions is used, this product many not operate normally.
• Application startup in Windows compatibility mode
• User simple switching
• Remote desktop
• Large Fonts (Detailed setting in the Display Properties)
*5 Set [SQL Server and Windows] for the security authentication mode.
*6 Up to 127 fields can be updated for a communication action.
*7 Do not access the same file with multiple GOTs and MES interface modules simultaneously.
*8 Only [Insert] can be used for the communication action.
*9 The rollback cannot be used for inserting data to a database.
*10 15GB or more of free space is required for using Windows Vista .
*11 A standard user or Administrator account is required for using Windows Vista .
*12 Memo-type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used.
*13 A field having multiple values cannot be used.

2-9 2.4 Operating Environment

2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer)
 1
Performance required for personal computer and operating system to be used
Performance required for personal computer
Operating system
CPU Required memory

OVERVIEW
Windows XP Professional Intel Pentium /Celeron series
CPU with clock speed of at least 300 128 MB or more
Windows 2000 Professional
MHz
Windows Server 2003 Intel Pentium /Celeron series
2
CPU with clock speed of at least 550 256 MB or more
Windows 2000 Server

CONFIGURATION
MHz
Windows Vista Ultimate Intel Pentium /Celeron series

SYSTEM
Windows Vista Enterprise CPU with clock speed of at least 1GB or more

Windows Vista Business 1GHz

3
Point
How to set security authentication mode (SQL Server and Windows)

SPECIFICATIONS
(1) For Microsoft SQL Server 2000 and Microsoft SQL Server 2005
Set the security authentication mode in the SQL Server Properties
(Configure) screen.
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

(2) For Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (MSDE 2000)
When installing MSDE2000, specify a command parameter.
setup sapwd = "sa" SECURITYMODE=SQL
(sa: Specify an arbitrary password.) 8
TROUBLESHOOTING

2.4 Operating Environment

2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer)
2 - 10
 2.5 Cautions on System Configuration

(1) Relational databases that support the MES interface function

For the relational databases that support the MES interface function, refer to the
following:
Section 2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer)

(2) Notes when CF card is used

Insert the memory card into the A drive of the GOT.
The CF card cannot be used in B drive.

2 - 11 2.5 Cautions on System Configuration

 1
CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

OVERVIEW
This chapter explains the performance specifications, functions and devices of the MES
interface function.
2
3.1 Performance Specifications

CONFIGURATION
The following are the performance specifications of the MES interface function.

SYSTEM
Reference
Item Specifications
section
No. of connected databases Up to 8 databases/project 3
Seven types
• Oracle 8i Standard Edition

SPECIFICATIONS
• Oracle 9i Standard Edition
• Oracle 10g Standard Edition
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition
Section 6.6.1
No. of connectable databases • Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine(MSDE 2000)
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

• Microsoft Access 2000

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
• Microsoft Access 2003
• Microsoft Access 2007
• Wonderware Historian 9.0
Allowable number of
Up to 64 jobs/project
Job settings
Trigger buffering Up to 128 tag components/tag
Section 6.7.1
5
No. of conditions can Up to 2 conditions
be combined • (Combination can be selected either AND or OR)/job

MES INTERFACE
20 types (Time specification (6 types), Specified time period,

FUNCTION
trigger
DB comparison between tag component values (6 types), comparison Section 6.7.2
conditions Condition type
interface between tag component value and constant value (6 types), At
module startup) and Handshake operation
Validation interval One second at the minimum 6
Allowable number of
Up to 10 actions/job

FUNCTION SETTING
settings
MES INTERFACE
Section 6.8
Communication action
4 types (Select, Update, Insert, MultiSelect)
type
Up to 8192 fields/project
No. of communication • [DB-Tag link setting]: Up to 256 rows/communication action
action fields • [Select/Update conditions]: Up to 8 rows/communication action 7
• [Select sort settings]: Maximum 8 rows/communication action Section 6.8.1
No. of records/data
Action Up to 40000 records/MultiSelect communication action
DB CONNECTION

selectable for
SETTING TOOL

Up to 45000 words/job
SERVICE AND

communication action
No. of operations
possible for operation (Up to 20 dyadic operations)/operation action
action Section 6.8.2
Operators for operation 6 types (Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, remainder, 8
action character string combination)
TROUBLESHOOTING

No. of resource data

Maximum 8192 fields/project Section 6.8.3
send action fields
(To the next page)

3.1 Performance Specifications 3-1

 (From the previous page)
Reference
Item Specifications
section
No. of tags Up to 64 tags/project
Up to 256 tag components/tag
No. of tag components
Up to 4096 tag components/project
5 types (Signed single-precision integer type (16 bits), signed
Device tag Data type double-precision integer type (32 bits), single-precision floating point
type (32 bits), bit type, character string type)
Section 6.5.3
Character string length Up to 32 characters
DB No. of statistical
Up to 64 tag components
interface processings
6 types
Device tag Statistical processing (Average, maximum, minimum, moving average*1, moving
maximum*1, moving minimum*1)
Program Allowable number of (Once before execution of the initial action + once after execution of
Section 6.7.3
execution settings the final action)/job
DB Buffering capacity for Maximum capacity: CF card capacity -32M bytes
Section 6.9.2
buffering communication errors*2 (16 Mbytes to 512 Mbytes)
Log capacity for MES interface function
Working Maximum capacity: 1 Mbyte (CF card)
execution Section 6.11
log
Log capacity for job execution events Maximum capacity: 2 Mbytes (CF card)

*1 [No. of samples] can be set up to 20.

*2 How to estimate the buffering time from the buffering capacity is shown below.
Buffering time = (Allowable No. of bufferings) (Frequency [times/hour]) [h]
Allowable No. of bufferings = (Capacity to be used) (SQL text length + Overhead (4 bytes)
SQL text length = Total field character length + 6 No. of fields + Total data length + 20 [bytes]

[Calculation Example]
In the case of the capacity of 64 Mbytes, the field name of 16 characters, the data length of 32
characters, access to 256 fields by one action per job, and executing once per 30 seconds
SQL text length = (16 256) + 6 256 + (32 256) = 13844 [bytes]
Allowable No. of bufferings = (64 1024 1024) (13844 + 4) 4846
Buffering time = 4846 (60 30 60) 40 [h]

3-2 3.1 Performance Specifications

 1
3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function

OVERVIEW
The following are GOT devices that can be set in the Device tag settings of the MES
interface function.

Type
Bit register inside the GOT
Description Available setting range
2
GOT bit register GB64 to GB65535*1
Can be used as a bit device.

CONFIGURATION
Data register inside the GOT
GOT data register GD0 to GD65535
Can be used as a word device.

SYSTEM
Special register inside the GOT
GOT special
Stores GOT's internal information, communication status, error information, etc. GS0 to GS1023*2
register
Can be used as a word device.
Used when making interaction between the MES interface function and the gateway function. 3
Virtual device for indirectly reading or writing the controller devices that are monitored by 1-1: EG0 to 239-64:
Gateway device
another GOT. EG32767*3

SPECIFICATIONS
Can be used as a word device.
*1 For GB0 to GB63, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
*2 Do not write any value to a write-prohibited GOT special register.
Setting a value to the GOT special register may affect the GOT operation. 4
For the GOT special register, refer to the following manual.

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

INTERFACE FUNCTION
*3 Specify the gateway device in the following format.
(Network No.) - (Station No.): EG (Device No.)
Network No.: 1 to 239
Station No.: 1 to 64
Device No.: 0 to 32767
5
Point
The gateway function setting is required for use of the gateway devices.

MES INTERFACE
For the gateway setting, refer to the following manual.

FUNCTION
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual (4.3 Connection Method)

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function 3-3
 3.3 Function List and Setting Item List

This section provides the lists of the functions and setting items that can be set for the
MES interface function.

(1) MES interface function list

Reference
Function Description
section
Section 5.1
DB interface function Executes communication with the database in units of jobs. Section 6.7
Section 6.8
Collects data in the internal devices or gateway devices of the GOT on the network in
units of tags. Section 5.1.3
Tag function
Assigning a database field to a tag component allows reading or writing of a database Section 6.5
value or device data that is specified by the tag component.
Trigger monitoring Monitors values such as the time and tag values and, when the trigger condition Section 5.1.4
function changes from false to true (when the conditions are met), starts a job. Section 6.7.2
Allows the system to buffer the data and the time that trigger conditions are met to the
user area of the GOT when too many trigger conditions (data transmission conditions)
Trigger buffering are met simultaneously. The action (operation and transmission of the data) for the Section 5.1.5
function buffered data is executed later. Section 6.7.1
Even when the data transmission triggers are activated frequently, no triggers are
missed so that all the jobs are executed.
Automatically creates an SQL text and communicates with the database.
The following three types of commands can be selected for the SQL text.
SQL text transmission Section 5.1.6
• Select/MultiSelect
(Communication action) Section 6.8.1
• Update
• Insert
Arithmetic processing
Section 5.1.7
function Allows operations of tag component values.
Section 6.8.2
(Operation action)
Resource data send
Sends the resource data collected in the GOT to the database. Section 5.1.8
function (Resource data
A SQL text (INSERT) is used for sending the resource data to the database. Section 6.8.3
send action)
Program execution Executes programs in the application server computer before execution of the first action Section 5.1.9
function and after execution of the last one in a job. Section 6.7.3
Temporarily stores SQL texts into a CF card when they cannot be sent due to network Section 5.1.10
disconnection or failure of the database server computer. Section 6.9.2
DB buffering function
After recovery, the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database. (Manual Section 6.10.4
operation is also possible.) Section 6.10.5
SNTP time synchronization Allows the time on the GOT to be synchronized with the time on the SNTP server Section 5.2
function computer on the network. Section 6.9.1
Used to stop/restart the MES interface function, check job operations and configure the
Diagnostics function Section 6.10
settings.
DB server function Allows direct access to a database upon request of the DB interface function. Section 7.1
ODBC connection
Executes the operation requested by the DB interface function or returns a response. Section 7.2
function
Connection setting
Restricts IP addresses of GOTs that can be connected to the database. Section 7.5
function
Log output function Outputs the execution status of DB Connection Service to the log. Section 7.8

3-4 3.3 Function List and Setting Item List

 1
(2) List of the MES interface setting items

OVERVIEW
Reference
Function Description
section
Device tag settings Configure the settings for the tag function.
Configure this setting when writing multiple records extracted from a database to the
Section 6.5
2
Array setting Section 6.5.2
same tag component.
Component setting Configure the settings for assigning GOT devices to tags. Section 6.5.3

CONFIGURATION
Server service settings Configure the settings for access to a server computer. Section 6.6
Job settings Configure the settings for the DB interface function. Section 6.7

SYSTEM
trigger conditions Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job. Section 6.7.2
Trigger buffering Set whether to utilize the trigger buffering function or not. Section 6.7.1
Communication action Configure the settings for communications with a database. Section 6.8.1 3
Operation action Configure the settings for operation of tag component values. Section 6.8.2
Resource data send

SPECIFICATIONS
Configure the settings for sending the resource data to the database. Section 6.8.3
action
program execution Configure the settings for the program execution function. Section 6.7.3
DB buffering Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not. Section 6.7.4
One-shot execution Execute a job as a one-shot task. Section 6.7.6
Option setting Configure the SNTP time synchronization setting and the DB buffering function setting. Section 6.9 4
SNTP time

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Configure the settings for the SNTP time synchronization function. Section 6.9.1

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

synchronization setting

INTERFACE FUNCTION
DB buffering setting Configure the settings for the DB buffering function. Section 6.9.2
diagnosis Perform the remote diagnosis for the MES Interface function. Section 6.10
Status The operation status of the option OS (MES Interface) can be checked. Section 6.10.1
Operation The operation status of the MES Interface function can be checked. Section 6.10.2
Change Job Status
Connection result of
The job status can be changed.
Connection with the server computer set in [Server Service setting], which is made at the
Section 6.10.3
5
Section 6.10.4
previous job execution time of the previous job execution, can be displayed.
DB buffering operation The DB buffering can be operated. Section 6.10.5

MES INTERFACE
MESI/F Log Displays the working log of the MES Interface function. Section 6.11

FUNCTION
MES Interface Execute
Displays the MES Interface function execution log. Section 6.11.1
Log
Job Execute Log Displays the job execution event log. Section 6.11.2
6
(3) List of setting items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
Reference
Function Description
section
Service port Specify the number of the port where the DB Connection Service operates.

DB access timeout
Set a timeout time (unit: seconds) used when no response may be returned after 7
requesting program execution or value writing/reading from the GOT to a database.
Determine whether or not to restrict IP addresses of GOTs whose connection to DB Section 7.5
IP address setting
DB CONNECTION

Connection Service is permitted.

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Output access log Set whether or not to output the access log.
Output SQL failed log Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log.

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

3.3 Function List and Setting Item List 3-5

 3.4 GOT Internal Device (GS)

3.4.1 GOT internal device list

The list of the GOT internal devices (GS) used for the MES interface module is shown
below.

Point
(1) For details of any other GOT internal devices (GS) than the shown areas used
for the MES interface function, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
(2) Values stored in the GOT internal devices (GS) are cleared to 0 when the GOT
is powered OFF and then ON or is reset.

Initial Reference
GS Application Name
value section
SNTP time synchronization setting status
265 1: [Synchronize with SNTP] 0
Section 3.4.2
0: [SNTP time synchronization setting not exist/failed]
266 to 272 SNTP time query result 0
273 MES interface
function Use prohibited - -
274
area
275 Monitoring interval timeout count 0
670 No. of trigger buffer data 0
Section 3.4.2
671 Trigger buffer overflow count 0
672 to 675 Trigger buffer overflow flag for a job 0

3.4.2 MES Interface Function area

This section explains the details of the special registers used for the MES interface
function.

(1) SNTP time synchronization setting status (GS265)

(a) The setting status of the SNTP time synchronization setting is stored.
For the SNTP time synchronization setting, refer to the following.
Section 6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting
0: [SNTP time synchronization setting not exist/failed]
1: [Synchronize with SNTP]

(b) When the "Synchronize using SNTP" box is checked in the Option setting
This area is set when the clock time information was obtained from the SNTP
server computer.
If it could not be obtained from the SNTP server computer, this area is not set
since the operation for selection of [Synchronize with PLC CPU time] is performed
(The time is synchronized with the time of the PLC CPU).

3-6 3.4 GOT Internal Device (GS)

3.4.1 GOT internal device list
 1
(2) SNTP time query result (GS266 to GS272)
When the "Synchronize using SNTP" box is checked in in the Option setting, the time

OVERVIEW
information obtained from the SNTP server is stored.

GS Name Description Setting side 2

266 SNTP time query result (Year) The four-digit year data is stored.
SNTP time query result
267 The month data, 01 to 12, is stored.

CONFIGURATION
(Month)
268 SNTP time query result (Day) The day data, 01 to 31, is stored.

SYSTEM
269 SNTP time query result (Hour) The hour data, 00 to 23, is stored.
SNTP time query result
270 The minute data, 00 to 59, is stored. Set by the
(Minute)
SNTP time query result
system 3
271 The second data, 00 to 59, is stored.
(Second)
The day-of-the-week data is stored.

SPECIFICATIONS
SNTP time query result (Day of 0: Sunday 1: Monday 2: Tuesday
272
the week) 3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday
6: Saturday

(3) Monitoring interval timeout count (GS275) 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

The cumulative number of times that a monitoring interval timeout has occurred is

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
stored.
If monitoring interval timeout occurs frequently, check the number of job settings and
the trigger condition setting.
For the monitoring interval timeout, refer to the following:
Appendix 2 About Monitoring Interval Timeout 5
(4) No. of trigger buffer data (GS670)

MES INTERFACE
The number of trigger buffer data is stored.

FUNCTION
When many trigger buffer data is stored for a long time, the GOT becomes busy. As a
result, some data may not be collected.
Check the number of job settings for which [Trigger buffering] is enabled and the 6
trigger condition setting.

FUNCTION SETTING
(5) Trigger buffer overflow count (GS671) MES INTERFACE

The cumulative number of times that a trigger buffer overflow has occurred is stored.
The trigger buffer overflow means that 129th trigger data is discarded without being
buffered when 128 trigger data is already buffered.
If trigger buffer overflow occurs frequently, check the number of job settings for which 7
[Trigger buffering] is enabled and the trigger condition setting.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

3.4 GOT Internal Device (GS)

3.4.2 MES Interface Function area
3-7
 (6) Trigger buffer overflow flag for a job (GS672 to GS675)
The flag indicates the status of trigger buffer overflow for each job.
When a trigger buffer overflow occurs for a job, the internal device corresponding to
the job turns ON.
The following table shows the internal devices that are corresponding to jobs 1 to 64.

Name Job and internal device

GS672 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
Jobs 1 to 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
GS673 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
Jobs 17 to 32 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
GS674 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
Jobs 33 to 48 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
GS675 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
Jobs 49 to 64 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

3-8 3.4 GOT Internal Device (GS)

3.4.2 MES Interface Function area
 1
CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE USE
OF THE MES INTERFACE FUNCTION

OVERVIEW
This chapter explains the procedures and settings to be done before use of the MES
interface function. 2

4.1 Settings and Procedures before Use of the MES Interface

CONFIGURATION
Function

SYSTEM
The flowcharts for use of the MES interface function are shown here.
3
Point

SPECIFICATIONS
Start the server computer, and then the GOT.

(1) Starting the server computer

4

DURES BEFORE USE OF THE

MES INTERFACE FUNCTION
SETTINGS AND PROCE-
Procedure before operation

Server computer/SNTP server computer

5
Database server computer *1 Application server computer *2 SNTP server computer *3

MES INTERFACE
Start up the SNTP server.

FUNCTION
Install a relational database and design Create a user program. *5
a table. *4

6
Set the ODBC of the database. Create an account for user program
execution. *6

FUNCTION SETTING
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of

MES INTERFACE
Database

Perform login check with the account

for user program execution. *7

Install DB Connection Service and Install DB Connection Service and

7
DB Connection Service Setting Tool. DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
Section 4.2 Installation and Section 4.2 Installation and
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

Uninstallation Uninstallation
SERVICE AND

Change the settings of DB Connection Change the settings of DB Connection

Service. Service.
Section 7.1 DB Connection
Service Functions
Section 7.1 DB Connection
Service Functions
8
TROUBLESHOOTING

Operation *8

4.1 Settings and Procedures before Use of the MES Interface Function 4-1
 *1 Be sure to make the settings to use the DB interface function.
Section 5.1 DB Interface Function
*2 Make the settings when using the program execution function.
Section 5.1.9 Program execution function
*3 Make the settings when using the time on the SNTP server computer with the SNTP time
synchronization function.
Section 5.2 SNTP Time Synchronization Function
*4 Restart the personal computer after installing the relational database.
Communication with GOT may fail if not restarted.
*5 Create it only when necessary.
An existing program, a program included in OS, or a commercially available program can also be
used.
*6 Always set a password for the account for user program execution.
Use of an account without password will result in execution failure by OS.
*7 If the login is not confirmed, the program execution function may not operate properly.
When installing DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool, log in using a
user name with administrative right.
*8 Do not log in the server computer using an account for user program execution during user
program execution.
Doing so may cause incorrect operation of the program execution function.

4-2 4.1 Settings and Procedures before Use of the MES Interface Function
 1
(2) Starting the GOT

OVERVIEW
Procedure for starting GOT

Preparation of the GOT On the configuration computer 2

Mount the option function board on the Install GT Designer2.

CONFIGURATION
*1
GOT.

SYSTEM
Connect to Ethernet. *2 Create project data. *3

Install a CF card. Configure MES interface settings. 3

(Only when needed)

SPECIFICATIONS
Connect the GOT to the configuration computer.
(USB, RS-232, Ethernet) *4

Install the option OS on the GOT.

(Including MES interface)
4

DURES BEFORE USE OF THE

Download the project data to the GOT.

MES INTERFACE FUNCTION

(Including MES interface settings)

SETTINGS AND PROCE-

Operation start

*1 For GT16, use the MES interface function board.

For GT15, use the option function board with MES interface function.
5
*2 For GT16, use the built-in Ethernet interface.
For connecting GT16 to a device supporting 10BASE(-T/2/5), configure the network that supports

MES INTERFACE
both 10Mbps and 100Mbps communication speeds by using a switching hub.
For GT15, mount the Ethernet communication unit.

FUNCTION
*3 Configure the Extend I/F Setting in Communication Settings of GT Designer2.
In the Extend I/F Setting, select any of the following and set an IP address.
• CH: * Driver: Ethernet download
• CH: * Driver: Gateway 6
• CH: 1 Driver: Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700

FUNCTION SETTING
• CH: 1 Driver: Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700,Gateway
MES INTERFACE
When using the MES interface function only on the Ethernet, the GOT port No. setting in
Communication Detail Settings is ignored.
*4 In Ethernet connection, the option OS cannot be installed.
To install the option OS, use USB or RS-232 connection.

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 Settings and Procedures before Use of the MES Interface Function 4-3
 4.2 Installation and Uninstallation

For how to install and uninstall each execution software for the MES interface function on
the operating environment, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (2. INSTALLATION
AND UNINSTALLATION)

4-4 4.2 Installation and Uninstallation

 1
CHAPTER 5 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION

OVERVIEW
The MES interface function can be used on the GOT by installing the option OS (MES
Interface).
This chapter describes the MES interface function.
2
Point

CONFIGURATION
The MES interface function settings are configured on the MES interface function
setting screen of GT Designer2.

SYSTEM
Chapter 6 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION SETTING

3
5.1 DB Interface Function

SPECIFICATIONS
The DB interface function executes access to the database in units of jobs.

5.1.1 DB interface function operation 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
The operation of the DB interface function is shown below.

INTERFACE FUNCTION
GOT
Device *6 Tag 1 Job 1
Trigger monitoring *2 Database server computer

Action *3 5
GD1000 Component Communication action 1 (Update)
Operation action 2

MES INTERFACE
Communication action 3 (Insert)
Resource data send action 4

FUNCTION
Database
Executed in
order

Communication action 10 (Select) 6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

Program execution *4

*1 DB buffering *5 Execute
file
7
Application server computer
*1 Collects tag data. Section 5.1.3 Tag function
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

*2 Activates a job. Section 5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function

SERVICE AND

*3 Accesses the database and performs arithmetic processing.

• Section 5.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)
• Section 5.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)
• Section 5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action) 8
*4 Executes programs. Section 5.1.9 Program execution function
*5 Temporarily stores SQL texts that cannot be sent due to a communication error.
TROUBLESHOOTING

Section 5.1.10 DB buffering function

*6 For devices usable for the MES interface function, refer to the following.
Section 3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.1 DB interface function operation
5-1
 5.1.2 Job execution procedure

The following is the job execution procedure.

Start

Stopped
Is the GOT working?

No job is executed during the stop.

Working Activate the GOT.
• Section 6.10.1 Checking the MES Interface
Function status (Status)
• Section 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface
Function status (Operation)

Disabled
Is the job enabled?

The job is not executed when it is disabled.

Enabled Enable the job.
• Section 6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change
job status)

Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met.

• Section 5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
• Section 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions

When [Handshake operation] is selected for Trigger conditions,

tag component values are obtained again.

Is the [Execute Not checked

program before action.] box
checked?

Checked
The program in the application server computer is
executed before execution of the first action.
• Section 5.1.9 Program execution function
• Section 6.7.3 Setting items in Program
execution

(To the next page)

5-2 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.2 Job execution procedure
 1
(From the previous page) Executed in order

OVERVIEW
Actions are executed.
Up to 10 actions can set for a job, and they are
executed in order.
• Section 5.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)
• Section 5.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action) 2
• Section 5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send
action)

CONFIGURATION
• Section 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

SYSTEM
In Update/Insert actions, substitute or insert values are
committed to database.
3
Is the [Execute
Not checked
program after action.]

SPECIFICATIONS
box checked?

Checked
The program in the application server computer is
executed after execution of the last action.
• Section 5.1.9 Program execution function
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

• Section 6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
If a value was written to a tag component, it is written
to the device data of the PLC CPU.

Job execution is completed.

5
End

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Point
For the case where an error occurs during job execution, refer to the following:
Section 5.3 (2) When an error occurs in job execution 6

FUNCTION SETTING
5.1.3 Tag function
MES INTERFACE

The tag function collects device data of the GOTs on the network in units of tags.
Assigning a database field to a tag component allows reading or writing of a database
value or device data that is specified by the tag component.
For the tag function setting, refer to the following:
7
Section 6.5 Device Tag Settings
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

GOT

Device tag name: Process1

Device Component name Device Data type
Read
GD1000
GD2000
Work_No.
Parameter
GD1000
GD2000
Single
Double
8
GD2001 Write
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.3 Tag function
5-3
 5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function

The trigger monitoring function monitors values such as the time and tag values and, when
the trigger condition changes from false to true (when the condition is met), starts a job.
The following setting options are available as conditions for start.
• [Time specification startup]: Starts the job at the specified time.
• [Specified time period startup]: Starts the job at the specified intervals (Unit:
Seconds).
• [Value monitoring startup]:
Compares the actual tag component value with the condition value (tag component
value or constant value) at every sampling times, and starts the job when the
condition is met.
• [Handshake operation]:
Starts the job on request from the GOT.
Completion of job execution can be reported to the GOT.
• [At GOT startup]:
Starts the job only once when the GOT starts up.
Two kinds of conditions can be used in combination for starting a job.
For the trigger monitoring function setting, refer to the following:
Section 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions

Tag

Component

Value monitoring
startup Job

Time specification
1st of every month, 9:00:00 startup Trigger
Specified time Conditions met Job startup
3600 seconds monitoring
period startup

Handshake
operation

ON

OFF

5-4 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
 1
Point
In [Value monitoring startup], tag component values used for triggering monitoring
and those used in the activated job are collected at different timings without

OVERVIEW
synchronization.

Tag 1 Sampling cycle: 1s 2

Job Component name Value
Component A 10 Sampling time 10:08:30
Component B 20

CONFIGURATION
Tag 2 Sampling cycle: 60s
Trigger When Tag 1Component A is 10 Component name Value Sampling time 10:08:00

SYSTEM
Component B 5
Action 1) Add Tag 2 Component B to Tag 1 Component B.
Tag 3 Sampling cycle: 1s

3
Action 2) Send Tag 3 Component C to database Component name Value
Component C 12
Sampling time 10:08:21
Component D 3
Component E 4 (Too many components,
Component F 8 sampling delayed)

SPECIFICATIONS
: :

To synchronize collection of the above tag component values, perform either of

the following (Plan 1) or (Plan 2).
(Plan 1)
Use [Handshake operation]. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Section 6.7.2 (8) Handshake operation

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Tag 1 Sampling cycle: 1s
Job Component name Value
Component A 10 GOT device

5
Component B 20

Trigger When startup tag component turns ON Tag 2 Sampling cycle: 60s
(Handshake Component name Value GOT device
operation setting) Component B 5

MES INTERFACE
Action 1) Add Tag 2 Component B to Tag 1 Component B. Tag 3 Sampling cycle: 1s

FUNCTION
Component name Value
Action 2) Send Tag 3 Component C to database Component C 12
Component D 3 GOT device
Component E 4
Component F 8
: : 6

FUNCTION SETTING
(Plan 2)
MES INTERFACE
Put the tag components used in a job into one tag.
Since the tag components collect the specified GOT device values during job
execution, the execution time of the job is increased.

Job
7
Tag 2 Sampling cycle: 3s
DB CONNECTION

Component name Value

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Component A 10
Trigger When Tag 1Component A is 10 Component B 20
Component B' 5
Component C 12 Sampling time 10:08:21
Action 1) Add Tag 1 Component B' to Tag 1 Component B.
Component D 3
Action 2) Send Tag 1 Component C to database Component E
Component F
4
8
8
: :
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
5-5
 5.1.5 Trigger buffering function

When too many trigger conditions (data transmission conditions) are met simultaneously,
the trigger buffering function allows the system to buffer the data and time trigger
conditions are met to the user area of the GOT. The action (operation and transmission of
the data) for the buffered data is executed later.
Even when the data transmission triggers are activated frequently, no triggers are missed
so that all the jobs are executed.
Enable [Trigger buffering] in each job setting to utilize the trigger buffering function.

(1) Trigger buffering function

The following describes the behavior of a job for which [Trigger buffering] is enabled.

(a) When normal (Interval that trigger conditions are met is longer than processing
time of action)
• When trigger conditions are met, the tag data and the time are stored in the
trigger buffer.
• The action, which is specified by the data stored in the trigger buffer, is
executed immediately.

[GOT]
[When normal] Data
Trigger buffer trans-
Job 1 Job 1
mission
Trigger Action is
conditions executed Database
are met

Time Time

5-6 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.5 Trigger buffering function
 1
(b) When busy (Interval that trigger conditions are met is shorter than processing time
of action)

OVERVIEW
• Tag data and time that conditions are met are stored to the trigger buffer
every time the conditions are met.
• If an action cannot complete before another condition is met, up to 128 trigger
data can be stored. 2
[GOT]

CONFIGURATION
[When busy] Data
trans-

SYSTEM
Job 1 ... 1) Trigger buffer
Trigger conditions Job 1 ... 2) Trigger data (Tag data and time)
mission
are met
Job 3 ... 3) Trigger data (Tag data and time) Database
Job 1 ... 2)
Trigger conditions
Job 1 ... 1) 3
are met Action is
executed The action for "Job 1 ... 1)" is executed.

SPECIFICATIONS
Job 3 ... 3) The trigger data of "Job 1 ... 2)" and
Trigger conditions
are met "Job 3 ... 3)" is stored to the trigger buffer.

Time Time

The numbers 1) to 3) correspond to the order of that trigger conditions are met.
In this example, the jobs 1 and 3 access the same database.
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
(c) When becoming less busy (Interval that trigger conditions are met is longer than

INTERFACE FUNCTION
processing time of action)
• The action, which is specified by the data stored in the trigger buffer, is read
and executed sequentially.
• When the action for the trigger data in the trigger buffer completes, the trigger
5
data is cleared, and another trigger data can be stored.

MES INTERFACE
[GOT]

FUNCTION
[When becoming less busy] Data
Trigger buffer trans-
Job 1 ... 2)
mission
Action is

6
executed Database
Job 3 ... 3)
Action is

FUNCTION SETTING
executed The action for "Job 1 ... 1)" is executed.
The action for "Job 1 ... 2)" and "Job 3 ... 3)", MES INTERFACE
which is specified by the data in the trigger
buffer, is executed sequentially.
Time Time

The numbers 1) to 3) correspond to the order of that trigger conditions are met. 7
In this example, the jobs 1 and 3 access the same database.
DB CONNECTION

Point
SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

(1) For job operation for which [Trigger buffering] is disabled, refer to the
following:
Section 5.3 (1) Operation behavior of jobs 8
(2) Whether the condition is changed from false to true is judged at collection of
TROUBLESHOOTING

the tag.
Section 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.5 Trigger buffering function
5-7
 (2) Maximum times of trigger buffering
(a) The trigger buffering function allows up to 128 trigger data (tag data and time) to
be stored simultaneously.
A job can be stored for unlimited number of times.

(b) Check status of the trigger buffering in the following.

Number of jobs in the trigger buffer (GS670)
[MES Interface] - [Diagnostics] tab ( Section 6.10.6 Checking the trigger
buffering (Trigger buffering status))

(c) If 128 conditions are already met and another condition is met, the trigger of the
new condition is discarded.
Check the number of discards in the trigger buffer overflow (GS671).

(3) Clearing trigger buffer

Any of the following operation clears the trigger buffer.
• Power off the GOT.
• Reset the GOT (when changing the communication settings, etc.)
• Install the OS from GT Designer2
• Download project data, etc.
• Stop the MES interface function operation by [MES Interface] - [Diagnostics]
( Section 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation))

5-8 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.5 Trigger buffering function
 1
5.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)

The SQL text transmission function allows automatic creation of SQL texts, enabling

OVERVIEW
communications with the database.
The following three types of commands can be selected for the SQL text.
• Select/MultiSelect 2
• Update
• Insert

CONFIGURATION
For the SQL text transmission setting, refer to the following:
Section 6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action

SYSTEM
(1) Select/MultiSelect
Select/MultiSelect is used to write a database value to a tag component value area or
3
to store it in the temporary variable area by sending a SQL text to the database.

SPECIFICATIONS
When a value is stored in the temporary variable area, it can be used as a variable for
other actions.

(2) Update and Insert

Update and Insert are used to add a tag component value or a temporary variable to 4
an SQL text and write the value to the database.

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Database server computer

Select/MultiSelect
Select...
Tag Component
Temporary variable Data 5
Update
Update...

MES INTERFACE
Tag Component
Temporary variable Data Database

FUNCTION
Constant

Insert
Tag Component Insert...
Temporary variable
Constant
Data 6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)
5-9
 5.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)

The arithmetic processing function performs operations for tag component values.
In this function, up to 20 dyadic operations can be processed per operation action.
By storing an operation result in the temporary variable area, complicated operations are
also executable.
For the arithmetic processing function setting, refer to the following:
Section 6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action

An operand is selectable from

tag component, constant and
temporary variable.

Temporary Tag component Tag component

variable Constant Constant

Temporary Tag component Up to 20 dyadic operations

Tag component Constant
variable can be performed for one
operation action.

The result can be Four operations and

assigned to a tag remainder can be specified
component or by corresponding operators.
temporary variable.
Executed in order

5 - 10 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)
 1
5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action)

The resource data send function allows the GOT to send resource data collected in a GOT

OVERVIEW
buffering area and a CF card to a database.
Device values for controllers, alarm data for the GOT, and others can be stored to the
database without any communication programs. 2
For the resource data send function settings, refer to the following.
Section 6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Data transmission
Database
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Time No Count
08:20:10 101 10
08:30:20 102 11
08:30:30 105 12

Logging data, alarm data and others

4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(1) Resource data send function
(a) Available data to be sent
For using the resource data send function, set [Transmit resource action] in the
action for [Job settings]. 5
The following resource data can be sent to a database.

MES INTERFACE
Resource data Description

FUNCTION
Logging data Logging data collected by the logging function
Alarm data collected by the advanced user alarm
Advanced user alarm
observation setting
Alarm data
Advanced system Alarm data collected by the advanced system alarm 6
alarm observation setting

FUNCTION SETTING
GOT operation history data collected by the operation
Operation log data
MES INTERFACE
log function

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action)
5 - 11
 (b) Resource data to be sent
1) Settings on the resource data send action for the collected resource data
The GOT sends the resource data before and after turning on the GOT.
Specifying the number of resource data and the time of collecting the data or
others are available.
This setting allows the GOT to send resource data when the loads on the GOT
and controllers are lower.

[Resource data]

Data collected before Sending data at

turning on GOT* the first action
Turning on GOT
Data collected after
turning on GOT
First action

Sending data at
Database
the second action
Data collected after the
first action

Sending data at
Second action the third action
Data collected after the
second action
Third action
*Excluding logging data at the first action

Point
The GOT sends the resource data to the database only one time. The GOT does
not send the sent data to the database on the subsequent actions. Unnecessary
data is not stored to the database.
The GOT may send the sent data to the database in the following cases.
• When turning on the GOT
• When restarting the GOT (Downloading a project data or others)
Section 6.12 Precautions

5 - 12 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action)
 1
2) Sending one resource data at the multiple resource data send actions
When one resource data is sent at the multiple resource data send actions, the
resource data is sent and stored to the database for each action.

OVERVIEW
[Resource data]

Data collected before

turning on GOT
2
Turning on GOT
Resource data for the first action A

CONFIGURATION
Resource data for the first action B

SYSTEM
First action A
First action B
3
Collected data
Resource data for the second action A

SPECIFICATIONS
after turning on
Resource data for the second action B
GOT

Second action A

Resource data for the third action A

Second action B
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Third action A

Resource data for the action A is sent again when the action B is executed.

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action)
5 - 13
 5.1.9 Program execution function

The program execution function is used for executing programs in the application server
computer before execution of the first action and after execution of the last one in a job.
For the program execution function setting, refer to the following:
Section 6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
Programs that can be executed from [Command line] are applicable.

Since program execution is set on the application server computer as described below,
more sophisticated data linkage can be realized.

(1) Before executing the first action of the job

By executing programs before the first action of the job, data required for the job can
be produced on the database in advance.

(2) After executing the last action of the job

By executing programs after the last action of the job, data written to the database by
the job can be utilized for programs on the application server computer.

5 - 14 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.9 Program execution function
 1
5.1.10 DB buffering function

(1) DB buffering function

OVERVIEW
The DB buffering function temporarily stores SQL texts into a CF card when they
cannot be sent due to network disconnection or failure of the database server
computer. 2
After recovery, the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database. (Manual
operation is also possible.)

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Disconnected
3
Database

SPECIFICATIONS
INSERT

INSERT
INSERT
UPDATE
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
CF card

Recovered

5
Resend
Database

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
UPDATE 6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
CF card

Point 7
(1) To automatically send SQL texts after recovery, irrespective of transmission
DB CONNECTION

sequence, select the auto-resend processing.

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

This section (5)(c) Automatically resending data after recovery

(2) To send SQL texts after recovery, without changing the transmission
sequence, select the manual resend processing.
This section (5)(d) Manually resending data 8
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.10 DB buffering function
5 - 15
 (2) Factors for starting DB buffering
The DB buffering is conducted when SQL texts cannot be sent to the database by the
following factors:
• Network disconnection
• Failure of the database server computer
• Failure of the database software

Point
(1) If an error occurs when the sent SQL text is executed on the database, by
some reason such as its incorrectness or inconsistency with the database,
buffering is not performed and an SQL failure log is output on the database
server computer.
Section 7.1 DB Connection Service Functions
(2) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection
or failure of the database server computer, DB buffering is not performed until
the connection timeout is detected (approx. 10 seconds).
This section (7) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database
Even if a trigger condition is met again during connection timeout detection,
the corresponding job is not executed.
Section 5.3 (1) Operation behavior of jobs
(3) If SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to failure of database
software, DB buffering is not performed until detection of DB access timeout.
This section (7) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database
Time for detecting DB access timeout is set to 30 seconds by default.
Section 7.5 (2) DB access timeout (required) (Range: 1 to 3600; Default:
30)
Even if a trigger condition is met again during detection of DB access timeout,
the corresponding job is not executed.
Section 5.3 (1) Operation behavior of jobs

(3) Jobs applicable to DB buffering

Jobs performing Update or Insert actions can be stored in the DB buffer.
The DB buffering is not available for jobs performing Select/MultiSelect action.

(4) Setting the DB buffering

Start

Configure the settings for the DB buffering function.

Section 6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings

Set whether to enable or disable the DB buffering for

each job.
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

End

5 - 16 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.10 DB buffering function
 1
(5) DB buffering operation

OVERVIEW
(a) When no data are currently stored in the DB buffer

Start
2
Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met.

CONFIGURATION
Section 5.1.2 Job execution procedure

SYSTEM
Were the SQL texts sent Sent
to the database? 3
Sent to the database without being stored in the DB
This section (2) Factors for starting DB buffering buffer.

SPECIFICATIONS
Not sent

Is the [Enable DB buffering] Not checked

box checked?

Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

When disabled, the job execution is canceled without
DB buffering. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Checked Section 5.3 Precautions

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
DB buffering is started.

End 5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Point
Check the DB buffer status (No. of bufferings, utilization) and prevent the full
status of the DB buffer. 6
• Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

FUNCTION SETTING
• Section 6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.10 DB buffering function
5 - 17
 (b) When some data are currently stored in the DB buffer

Start

Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met.

Section 5.1.2 Job execution procedure

Yes Is "Manual resend" selected

for the job?

Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

No

Were the SQL texts sent Sent

to the database?
(c) Automatically resending
This section (2) Factors for starting DB buffering
Not sent

Is the [Enable DB buffering] Not checked

box checked?
When disabled, the job execution is canceled without
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering DB buffering.

Checked
Section 5.3 Precautions

DB buffering is started. *1

End

*1 When accumulated job data currently exist in the DB buffer.

Job settings DB buffer

Job 1 (Auto) Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto)

Job 2 (Auto) Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Stored in the order
Job 3 (Auto) that trigger conditions Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 4 (Manual) are met. Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 5 (Manual) Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 6 (Manual) Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)

Point
Check the DB buffer status (No. of bufferings, utilization) and prevent the full
status of the DB buffer.
• Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
• Section 6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)

5 - 18 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.10 DB buffering function
 1
(c) Automatically resending data after recovery

Start

OVERVIEW
Execution of the job with Auto resend setting is started.
1) The job with Auto resend setting is sent to the database
without being buffered. *1 2
In the order of storing the jobs data in the DB buffer,

CONFIGURATION
2) the accumulated data of the jobs with Auto resend
setting are sent again. *1

SYSTEM
Is there any job for which Yes
Manual resend is selected? 3
Job with Manual resend setting will not be sent even
3) after recovery.
No

SPECIFICATIONS
(d) Manually resending data

End

*1 Automatically resends job data after recovery.

The numbers 1) to 3) correspond to those shown in the above.
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
Job settings DB buffer Database

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Job 1 (Auto) Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto) Job 10_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 2 (Auto) Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual) Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 3 (Auto) Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual) Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 4 (Manual) Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto) 2) Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 5 (Manual) Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto) 5
Job 6 (Manual) Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)
3)

MES INTERFACE
Job 10 (Auto)

FUNCTION
1)

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.10 DB buffering function
5 - 19
 (d) Manually resending data

Start

Execute manual resend of the DB buffer data. After line recovery, retry the manual resend of DB buffer
Request for resend on [MES interface setting] - [Diagnosis] data.
tab
Request for resend on [Resend DB buffer request] of the
specified tag component
• Section 6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering
settings
• Section 6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB
buffering operation)

Were the SQL texts sent Not sent

to the database?

• This section (2) Factors for starting DB buffering

Sent
In the order of storage in the DB buffer, the accumulated data
1)
of the jobs with Manual resend setting are sent again. *1

If a job with manual resend setting is started during manual

2)
resending, its SQL texts are stored in the DB buffer and then
sent to the database. *1

Not completed Has all the manual resend

processing been completed?

Completed
If a job with manual resend setting is started after completion
3) of manual resending, its SQL texts are sent to the database
if it is accessible, without being buffered. *1

Is there any job for which Yes

Auto resend is selected?
Data of the job with Auto Resend setting are sent again
No after recovery.
(c) Automatically resending data after recovery
End

*1 Manually resending data

The numbers 1) to 3) correspond to those shown in the above.
Job setting DB buffer Database

Job 1 (Auto) Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto) 1) Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 2 (Auto) Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual) Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 3 (Auto) Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual) Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 4 (Manual) Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto) Job 10_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 5 (Manual) Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto) Job 11_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 6 (Manual) Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)

Job 10 (Manual) 2)
Job 11 (Manual)
3)

5 - 20 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.10 DB buffering function
 1

Point
If any of the jobs for which manual resend is selected exists in the DB buffer, it

OVERVIEW
remains there after recovery until manual resend is executed.

2
(6) Clearing the DB buffer
The DB buffer is cleared by the following:

CONFIGURATION
• After downloading the project data, for which the MES interface function is set, to
the GOT, powering OFF and ON or restarting the GOT

SYSTEM
• Clear request from [MES interface setting screen] - [Diagnosis tab].
Section 6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation) 3
• Clear request from [Clear DB buffer request] of the specified tag component
Section 6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings

SPECIFICATIONS
(7) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database
(a) When auto-send is selected for the job

1 If SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection or

4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

failure of the database server computer or database software, the system starts

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
DB buffering after detection of a timeout.

2 After DB buffering is started, whether SQL texts can be sent to the database or
not is checked every time each job is activated.

3 When the system has not been recovered from network disconnection or failure
5
of the database server computer or database software, DB buffering is executed
after detection of the timeout.

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Recovery from network
disconnection

Job startup Job startup Job startup 6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
After sending Sending SQL
SQL texts, texts
timeout detected
DB buffering executed DB buffering execution Auto-resending
DB buffer data
7
after checking if SQL
texts can be sent
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.10 DB buffering function
5 - 21
 (b) When manual resend is selected for the job

1 If SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection or

failure of the database server computer or database software, the system starts
DB buffering after detection of a timeout.

2 After started, DB buffering is performed without checking whether SQL texts can
be sent to the database or not for each job activation.

3 The data stored in the DB buffer are resend when manual resend is executed.

Recovery from network

disconnection

Job startup Job startup Manual resend operation

After sending
SQL texts,
timeout detected
DB buffering executed DB buffering executed Resending DB buffer data

(8) Precaution on the DB buffering

Do not remove the CF card from the GOT during DB buffering.

5 - 22 5.1 DB Interface Function

5.1.10 DB buffering function
 1
5.2 SNTP Time Synchronization Function

The SNTP time synchronization function allows the time on the GOT to be synchronized

OVERVIEW
with the time on the SNTP server computer on the network.
Time information is utilized for job start conditions or in send data to the database.
For the SNTP time synchronization function setting, refer to the following. 2
Section 6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting

CONFIGURATION
Point
For time synchronization with the SNTP server, pay attention to the following:

SYSTEM
• When using the SNTP time synchronization function, do adjust the time in
the time setting in Utility or in System Environment of GT Designer2.
The SNTP time synchronization function does not work if the clock of the
3
GOT is set to be adjusted to the clock data of external equipment.

SPECIFICATIONS
• To write the clock time of the SNTP server to controllers, use [Broadcast].
This function can be used in combination with [Broadcast].

SNTP server
SNTP time Time broadcast
synchronization 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Time adjustment

For [Adjust/Broadcast], refer to the following manual.

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.2 SNTP Time Synchronization Function 5 - 23

 5.3 Precautions

(1) Operation behavior of jobs

(a) When a trigger condition for a job is met again during execution of the job
1) Jobs for which [Trigger buffering] is disabled
A new job is not executed during execution of the previous job.
(Example)
When a trigger condition for a job is met again during execution of the job set
to [Value monitoring startup]

Condition value
Interval
of tag Tag component value
sampling

:Trigger conditions are met

Job Job Job :Job is not started after trigger
startup startup startup conditions are met
Job execution 1) 2) 3)

A new job is not executed during execution of the previous job.

2) Jobs for which [Trigger buffering] is enabled

Trigger data is stored to the trigger buffer, and the job for the stored trigger
data is executed after completion of the previous job.
(Example)
When a trigger condition for a job is met again during execution of the job set
to [Value monitoring startup]

Condition value

Interval
of tag Tag component value
sampling

:Trigger conditions
are met
Trigger data 2)
3) Trigger buffer
4)
Job Job Job Job Job
startup startup startup startup startup
Job execution 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

(b) When trigger conditions for multiple jobs are met concurrently
• Up to three jobs can start their executions concurrently in the order in [Job
settings].
• After completion of these jobs, executions of the other jobs are started
sequentially.
Note that, if a job uses the same item in [Server service settings] that is
currently used for another job, the job is not executed until another job
execution is completed.

5 - 24 5.3 Precautions
 1
(c) When actions are set for a job
When actions are set for a job, if a communication error occurs, a timeout time will

OVERVIEW
be generated.
In the case of multiple action settings, timeout time is generated for each action.
For the timeout time, refer to the following.
7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 2

CONFIGURATION
Job execution

Program execution (before actions)

SYSTEM
Action 1
Action 2

Action 10
3
Program execution (after actions)

SPECIFICATIONS
Timeout time occurs for each.
The time taken until completion of the job is obtained from the formula shown
below.
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

No. of communications Timeout time

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

No. of communications:Total number of set communication actions and program

INTERFACE FUNCTION
executions

Example) Time taken until completion of a job in the event of a communication

error
No. of communications: 10 + 1 + 1 = 12 5
Time taken until job completion: 12 30s = 360s

MES INTERFACE
Item Setting

FUNCTION
Communication action 12
Program execution (before action) 1
Program execution (after action) 1
Timeout 30 seconds 6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
(d) Monitoring interval timeout
Depending on the number of set jobs or the trigger condition setting, the
monitoring interval timeout may be generated.
Appendix 2 About Monitoring Interval Timeout
7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.3 Precautions 5 - 25
 (2) When an error occurs in job execution
(a) The job execution is canceled when the error cause is the following:
• Failure in device data writing due to network disconnection within the PLC
system
• Failure in device data writing, or operation error
• Failure in access to the database (Except jobs for which [Enable DB
buffering] is selected)
Section 5.1.10 DB buffering function

(b) If a job execution is canceled, the operation processed before the error
occurrence returns to the status before the job execution.

Remark
The following explains access to GOT device data and the database.
(1) GOT device data
Since all of data are written to the device data area in the GOT at a time upon
completion of job execution, any change due to the error is not reflected in the
device data of the GOT.
(2) Database
Rollback is executed assuming the time immediately before job activation as
a commit point.
However, when the database is Wonderware Historian, rollback is not
executed.
When an error occurs during inserting data into a database, the data inserted
into the database before occurring the error are reflected.

(c) When [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution] has been
selected, a value is assigned to the specified tag component.
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution

5 - 26 5.3 Precautions
 1
CHAPTER 6 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION SETTING

OVERVIEW
This chapter explains the setting of the MES interface function.

6.1 MES Interface Function Setting Screen 2

The MES interface function setting screen is a screen for configuring various settings

CONFIGURATION
required for the MES interface function.
In addition, the operation status of the MES interface function and the working log can be

SYSTEM
checked, and other operations such as stop/restart of the MES interface function can be
also performed.
3
6.2 Displaying the MES Interface Function Setting Screen

SPECIFICATIONS
1 Start GT Designer2.
For how to start GT Designer2, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (2.4. Starting
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

the Software)

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
2 Perform the following:
• Select [Common] [MES Interface] from the menu.

3 The MES interface screen is displayed. Configure the settings referring to the
following descriptions.
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 MES Interface Function Setting Screen 6-1

 6.3 Screen Structure

This section explains the structure of the MES interface function setting screen.

6.3.1 Screen structure

Title bar

Tab

Edit items tree

Section 6.3.2
Operations using
the Edit items tree

Detailed setting
edit screen

Remark
(1) Display on the title bar
On the title bar, the status of connection to the GOT is displayed.
The connection status displays are shown below.

Connection type Display Remarks

Displays the communication
RS232 (Connect Type RS232 COM1)
port.
USB (Connect Type USB) -
Ethernet (Connect Type Ethernet 192.168.3.10) Displays the IP address.

(2) Column width adjustment

The column width of the tables can be adjusted on the MES interface function
setting screen.
To adjust the width, drag the right boundary line of the column.
When only a part of a long item name is displayed, this adjustment is useful.

6-2 6.3 Screen Structure

6.3.1 Screen structure
 1
6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree

The Edit items tree shows overall MES interface function settings in a tree.

OVERVIEW
This section explains the operations using the Edit items tree.

CONFIGURATION
Project root

SYSTEM
Item

Setting type
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4
(1) Selecting an item

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
1 When double-clicking the project root or each setting type, some items are
displayed.

2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area. 5
(2) Adding an item

MES INTERFACE
1 Selecting an item or a setting type to be added and performing either of the

FUNCTION
following will add the item.
• Select an item of the same type or a setting type, right-click the mouse, and
choose [Add]. 6
• Double-click a setting type that contains no item.

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
2 When the item is added properly, it is automatically selected and the edit screen
is switched to the one for the added item.

Point 7
Since the number of items that can be added is limited depending on the setting
type, refer to the relevant section of each item.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.3 Screen Structure

6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
6-3
 (3) Deleting an item

1 Select an item to be deleted and right-click the mouse. Selecting [Delete] deletes
the item.

Point
For precautions on the item deletion, refer to the following.
Section 6.12 (2) When deleting an item

(4) Replicating an item

1 Select an item to be copied, right-click it to display the menu. Selecting [Copy &
Paste] replicates the item.

2 When the item is added properly, it is automatically selected and the edit screen
is switched to the one for the added item.

Point
Since the number of items that can be added is limited depending on the setting
type, refer to the relevant section of each item.

6-4 6.3 Screen Structure

6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
 1
6.4 Setting

OVERVIEW
Configure the settings for the MES interface function.

1 Click the "Setting" tab.

2
2 The "Setting" sheet is displayed on the detailed setting edit screen.
3 For each of the setting items, refer to the section shown below.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Reference
Item Description
section 6
Device tag settings Configure the settings for the tag function. Section 6.6

FUNCTION SETTING
Server service settings Configure the settings for access to a server computer. Section 6.7
Job settings Configure the settings for the DB interface function. Section 6.8 MES INTERFACE

Configure the SNTP time synchronization setting and the DB buffering function
Option Setting Section 6.9
setting.

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.4 Setting 6-5

 6.5 Device Tag Settings

Configure the settings for the tag function.

For the tag function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.3 Tag function
Configured tags are used in [Job settings], etc.

1 Double-clicking [Device tag settings] in the Edit items tree displays relevant items.

2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.

Point
(1) How to add, delete, or copy an item
For addition, deletion or copying of items, refer to the following:
Section 6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
(2) When an item is added or copied, a "New Tag" item is added.

6-6 6.5 Device Tag Settings

 1
6.5.1 Setting items in Device tag settings

Up to 64 items can be set in [Device tag settings] within one project.

OVERVIEW
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Item Description
Device tag name Enter a device tag name. (Up to 16 characters)
Set whether to periodically sample the tag or not.
Sampling setting
Set a sampling interval to sample the tag. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Set whether to use arrays for the tag or not.

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

Array setting

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Section 6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting
Configure the tag component settings.
Component setting input
Section 6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
Displays a list of the components that have been already set.
Component list
Section 6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
Array block size Make setting when changing the block size manually.
5
No. of tag components in
Displays the number of all the tag components in the project.
project

MES INTERFACE
No. of statistical Displays the number of the components in the project, for which [Perform

FUNCTION
processings in project statisticcal processing] is selected.
No. of device points in tag Displays the number of total device points used in [Device Tag setting].

(1) Device tag name (Up to 16 characters) 6

Enter a device tag name.

FUNCTION SETTING
Configured tags are used in [Job settings], etc.
For characters that can be used for device tag names, refer to the following: MES INTERFACE

Appendix 2 About Monitoring Interval Timeout

Note that using the name same as the one set in [Server service settings] is not
allowed.
7
(2) Sampling setting
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

(a) When sampling is enabled

The tag is sampled in the specified interval.
When selecting [Sampling], also set a sampling interval in units of seconds. The
setting range for the interval is 1 to 32767 seconds. 8
(b) When sampling is disabled
TROUBLESHOOTING

The tag is not sampled.

When [Do not sample] is selected, statistical processing cannot be performed for
tag component values.

6.5 Device Tag Settings

6.5.1 Setting items in Device tag settings
6-7
 Point
(1) The GOT becomes less busy if [Do not sample] is selected for the following
tags.
• Tags only for writing
• Tags for sampling device values with the handshake operation.
For the handshake operation, refer to the following:
Section 6.7.2 (8) Handshake operation
(2) When [Do not sample] is selected, the setting items for reading tags cannot
be selected for the tag. (Except cases that [Handshake operation] is set for
the trigger conditions.)
• Tag component values that are set in [Select/Update conditions] in
[Select] of [Communication action]
(3) When [Array setting] is set for the tag, [Do not sample] is fixed for the
sampling setting.

6-8 6.5 Device Tag Settings

6.5.1 Setting items in Device tag settings
 1
6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting

An array is a data format, in which the specified number of data of the same data type are

OVERVIEW
arranged sequentially.
The Array setting is set when writing multiple records extracted from a database to the
same tag component. 2
Either of the following can be selected for device assignment to each tag component.
• Assigning consecutive devices to each tag component (series)

CONFIGURATION
• Handling all tag components as a block and assigning the same kind of devices in a
series of blocks (block)

SYSTEM
Tags with array settings are used for [MultiSelect].
Section 6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
3

SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Use array
When the [Use array] checkbox is checked, the tag is arranged as arrays. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Point

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
(1) When the array setting is set, device data are not collected.
(2) The array setting is unavailable for the tags set for the actions in [Job
settings].

5
(2) Length of array (Range: 2 to 40000, Default: 2)

MES INTERFACE
Set the number of arrays for the tag.

FUNCTION
(3) Series/Block (Default: Series)
Select a method for the array setting.
6
(a) Series

FUNCTION SETTING
Devices of respective tag components are arranged consecutively.
(Example)When [Length of array] is set to 4 with [series] setting MES INTERFACE

Only the start device (device in n=1) need be set.

Devices in and after n=2 are configured automatically.

n=1 n=2 n=3 n=4 7

Component A GB0 GB1 GB2 GB3
DB CONNECTION

GD100 GD102 GD104 GD106

Component B
SETTING TOOL

to GD101 to GD105 to GD107

SERVICE AND

to GD103
GD1000 GD1004 GD1008 GD1012
Component C to GD1003 to GD1007 to GD1011 to GD1015

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.5 Device Tag Settings

6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting
6-9
 (b) Block
Devices of all tag components are arranged as a block.
The size of the block can be changed in [array block size].
For [array block size], refer to the following.
Section 6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
Usually, the block size need not be changed because it is automatically adjusted
to avoid device duplication.
(Example) When [Length of array] is set to 4 with [block] setting
Only the start device (device in n=1) need be set.
Devices in and after n=2 are configured automatically

n=1 n=2 n=3 n=4

Component A GD0 GD7 GD14 GD21

Component B GD1 to GD2 GD8 to GD9 GD15 to GD16 GD22 to GD23
Component C GD3 to GD6 GD10 to GD13 GD17 to GD20 GD24 to GD27

Block

Point
When device types are different, [block] cannot be selected.
For the device types, refer to the following.
Section 3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function

6 - 10 6.5 Device Tag Settings

6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting
 1
6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting

Configure the settings for assigning GOT devices to tags.

OVERVIEW
Up to 256 components can be set for one tag.
Up to 4096 components can be set for one project.

(Adding a component) 2
• Set required items in [Component setting input], and click the Add button.

CONFIGURATION
• The component is added in [Component list].

(Modifying a component)

SYSTEM
• When a component to be modified is selected in [Component list], its settings are
displayed in [Component setting input].
3
• Modify the item settings in [Component setting input], and click the Replace
button.

SPECIFICATIONS
(Deleting a component)
• Select a component to be deleted in [Component list], and click the Delete button.

(Deleting the settings in [Component setting input])

• Clicking the Clear button deletes the settings in [Component setting input]. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.5 Device Tag Settings

6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
6 - 11
 Item Description
Component name Enter a component name. (Up to 16 characters)
Head device Set device name.
Component Data type Select the data type of the sampling data.
setting Character string Set a character string length when [String] is selected for [Data type].(1 to 32
input length characters)
Perform statistical
Set whether to perform statistical processing or not.
processing
Component name Displays a component name.
Device Displays a device range used.
Data type Displays a data type.
When [Perform statistical processing] is set, displays the type of statistical
Statistical type
processing.
When [Array setting] is set, displays the device range of array No.n.
Device [n] For a display example, refer to the following.
Section 6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting
Displays the array No. that is currently displayed in [Device [n]] of
n (Arrray No.)
[Component List].
If this is clicked, the device range of the first array is displayed in [Device [n]] of
[Component List].
< button When the device range of the first array is already displayed, this button cannot be
clicked.
If this is clicked, the device range of the previous array is displayed in [Device [n]] of
[Component List].
Component < button When the device range of the first array is already displayed, this button cannot be
List clicked.
If this is clicked, the device range of the next array is displayed in [Device [n]] of
[Component List].
> button When the device range of the last array is already displayed, this button cannot be
clicked.
If this is clicked, the device range of the last array is displayed in [Device [n]] of
< [Component List].
button When the device range of the last array is already displayed, this button cannot be
clicked.

Selecting a component in [Component List] and clicking the button reverses the
button order between the selected component and the one immediately above it.

The button cannot be clicked on the first component.

Selecting a component in [Component List] and clicking the button reverses the
button order between the selected component and the one immediately below it.

The button cannot be clicked on the last component.

Array block size Make setting when changing the block size manually.

Point
The following are displayed on the status bar of [Device Tag setting].
• [No. of tag components in project]
The total number of tag components in the project is displayed.
• [No. of statistical processings in project]
The number of component settings in the project, for which [Perform
statistical processing] is checked, is displayed.
• [No. of device points in tag]
The total number of device points used in [Device tag settings] is
displayed.
Up to 40000 device points can be set for a tag with [Array setting].

6 - 12 6.5 Device Tag Settings

6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
 1
(1) Component name (Up to 16 characters)
Enter a component name.

OVERVIEW
For characters that can be used for component names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable
names, etc. 2
(2) Device

CONFIGURATION
• Set a device type and an actual device number.
• Bit specification is not allowed for word devices.

SYSTEM
• For accessible devices, refer to the following:
Section 3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function
3
(3) Data type

SPECIFICATIONS
Select the data type of the sampling data (device data).

Selectable
Item Description
Device
Single word Handles data as single word data (16-bit Integer type). Word
Double word Handles data as double word data (32-bit Integer type). Word
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Real number Handles data as floating point data. Word

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Bit Handles data as bit data (in units of bits (0/1)). Bit
String*1 Handles data as character strings. Word

*1 When [Data type] is [String], device values are processed as follows:

• When the device value is not an ASCII code or JIS code
It is replaced with "." (period: 2EH).
• When the device value is a model-dependent character 5
The character code may be converted when an action is executed.
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable names,

MES INTERFACE
etc.
• When the device value is a termination character (NULL code: 00H)

FUNCTION
The character data following it are ignored. (The character string is regarded as terminated.)

(4) Character string length (2 to 32 characters) 6

(a) Set a character string length when [String] is selected for [Data type].

FUNCTION SETTING
(b) When [String] is selected, data are stored as follows: MES INTERFACE

1) When the value length is shorter than the character string length
NULL codes (00H) are stored after the stored values.
Example: "ABCD" is stored in the device of the tag component, whose 7
character length is 8.
A B C D
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

41h 42h 43h 44h 00h 00h 00h 00h

2) When the value length is longer than the character string length
The values whose quantity is equal to the character string length are stored.
Example: "ABCD" is attempted to be stored in the device of the tag 8
component, whose character length is 2.
TROUBLESHOOTING

"AB"

(c) Odd numbers are not allowed for the character string length setting.
Set an even number for the character string length.

6.5 Device Tag Settings

6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
6 - 13
 (5) Perform statistical processing
(a) Set whether to perform statistical processing or not.
Up to 64 components that have [Perform statistical processing] setting can be set
in all projects. (Check [No. of statistical processings in project] on the status bar.)
When the [Perform statistical processing] box is checked, statistical processing is
performed for tag component values.
Statistically processed values can be used by specifying the tag component
values, for which [Perform statistical processing] is selected, in [Job setting].
Note that this setting is not available when:
• [Do not sample] is selected in [Sampling setting].
• The data type of the tag component is [String].
• [Array setting] is set.

(b) When [Perform statistical processing] is selected, set the following items.
Item Description
Statistical type Select a type of the statistical processing.
Specify the number of samples when [Moving average], [Moving
No. of samples
maximum], or [Moving minimum] is selected.

1) Statistical type
Select a type of the statistical processing.
Item Description
*1 An average value after starting sampling
Average
Maximum*1 The maximum value after starting sampling
Minimum*1 The minimum value after starting sampling
An average of the tag component values that are collected at
sampling intervals for the number of times specified by [No. of
Moving average*2 *3 samples]
Since the processing range moves at each sampling, the latest value
can be obtained.
The maximum value in the tag component values that are collected
at sampling intervals for the number of times specified by [No. of
Moving maximum*2 *3 samples]
Since the processing range moves at each sampling, the latest value
can be obtained.
The minimum value in the tag component values that are collected at
sampling intervals for the number of times specified by [No. of
Moving minimum*2 *3 samples]
Since the processing range moves at each sampling, the latest value
can be obtained.

6 - 14 6.5 Device Tag Settings

6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
 1
*1 If a statistical value of [Average], [Maximum], or [Minimum] is reset, a value obtained after resetting
will be stored.
• How to reset a statistical value of [Average], [Maximum], or [Minimum]
Perform substitution of some value for the relevant tag component using [Operation action] of a

OVERVIEW
job.
For operation actions, refer to the following:
Section 6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
The statistical processing is reset and a value processed after the substitution is stored. 2
*2 Statistical values of [Moving average], [Moving maximum], and [Moving minimum] cannot be reset.
*3 When a tag component having [Moving average], [Moving maximum], or [Moving minimum]

CONFIGURATION
setting is specified in a job, the job is not activated until data are collected for the specified number
of times after start of sampling.

SYSTEM
2) No. of samples (2 to 20)
Specify the number of samples when [Moving average], [Moving maximum], or
[Moving minimum] is selected.
3

SPECIFICATIONS
(Moving average when [No. of samples] is 4)

Device value 4) Sampling interval

3)
2) 5)
1) 6) 8) 9)
7) 12)
4
10) 11)

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
1st Tag component value
2nd Moving average
3rd
5
0 Time (seconds)

<Change in tag component values>

MES INTERFACE
1st 2nd 3rd

FUNCTION
1)+2 )+3)+4 ) 2 )+3)+4 )+5) 3 )+4)+5 )+6)
4 4 4

FUNCTION SETTING
(6) n (Array No.)
MES INTERFACE
When [Array setting] is set, the device range of array No.n, is displayed in [Device [n]]
of [Component List].

7
To change the [Device [n]] display, use the following methods.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

• Enter a value in the box.

SERVICE AND

• Change the value with the , , , or button.

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.5 Device Tag Settings

6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
6 - 15
 (7) Array block size
When [block] is selected in [Array setting], [array block size] setting is available.

Usually, the block size need not be changed because the it is automatically adjusted
to avoid duplication of components.
Change [array block size] when:
• Setting a desired number for the start device No. of each block.
• Adding any component in the future.
The following example explains the cases where [array block size] is manually set and
is not set.
(Example) When [Component D] is to be added in the future
• When 10 is set for [array block size], device numbers are not changed.
• When nothing is set for [array block size], device numbers in and after array
No.2 are changed.

[When the size is set]

(Array block size = 10)

n=1 n=2 n=3

Component A GD0 GD10 GD20
Component B GD1 to GD2 GD11 to GD12 GD21 to GD22
Component C GD3 to GD8 GD13 to GD18 GD23 to GD28
Component D GD9 GD19 GD29
Component name Device Data type
Component A GD0 Single word
Component B GD1 Double word
[When the size is not set]
Component C GD3 String (12 characters)
Planned to Component D GD9 Single word n=1 n=2 n=3
be added
GD9 GD18
Component A GD0 GD10 GD20
GD10 to GD11 GD19 to GD20
Component B GD1 to GD2 GD11 to GD12 GD21 to GD22
GD12 to GD17 GD21 to GD26
Component C GD3 to GD8
GD13 to GD18 GD23 to GD28
Component D GD9 GD19 GD29

(8) Precautions on [Component setting]

If a wrong device number is set for a component in [Component setting], an error will
occur on another component that has the same access target CPU setting.
Correct the device number in [Component setting].

6 - 16 6.5 Device Tag Settings

6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
 1
6.6 Server Service Settings

OVERVIEW
Configure the settings for the access to a server computer.
The set server service name is used in [Job setting].

1 Double-clicking [Server Service setting] in the Edit items tree displays relevant items. 2
2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed

CONFIGURATION
setting edit screen area.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.

SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
Point MES INTERFACE

(1) How to add, delete, or copy an item

For addition, deletion or copying of items, refer to the following:
Section 6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
(2) When an item is added or copied, a "NewServer" item is added. 7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.6 Server Service Settings 6 - 17

 6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings

Up to 8 items can be set in [Server service settings] within one project.

Item Description
Sever service name Enter a server service name. (Up to 16 characters)
Server type Select the server type of the server computer to be accessed.
Enter a decimal IP address of the server computer where DB Connection
IP address
Service is installed.
Set a port number of the server computer.
Port No.
(Range: 1024 to 65535, Default: 5112)
Set a user name used to access the server computer.
User name
(Up to 30 characters)
Password/Confirm Set a password used to access the server computer.
password (Up to 30 characters)
Data source name Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed.
Database type Select the type of the database server.
Access error notification
Set whether to enable or disable notification of the access error status.
setting
In case a connection error occurs on the network between the GOT and
the server computer, set a timeout time during which the GOT will detect
Connection timeout
the error.
(Range: 1 to 180 seconds, Default: 10 seconds)

6 - 18 6.6 Server Service Settings

6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings
 1
(1) Server service name (Up to 16 characters)
Enter a server service name.

OVERVIEW
The set server service name is used in [Job setting].
For characters that can be used for server service names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable 2
names, etc.
Note that using the name same as the one of the device tags set in [Device tag

CONFIGURATION
settings] is not allowed.

SYSTEM
(2) Server type
(a) Select the server type of the server computer to be accessed. 3
Item Description
Database server Used in [Communication action] of [Job setting].

SPECIFICATIONS
Application server Used in [Program execution] of [Job setting].

(b) When [Database server] is selected, set the following items.

Item Description
Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed. 4
For characters that can be used for data source names, refer to the

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
Data source name following:

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table
names, etc.
Select the type of the database server.
• Oracle 8i • Oracle 9i • Oracle 10g
Database type
• SQL Server 2000/2005 • MSDE2000 • Access2000
5
• Access2003/2007 • Wonderware Historian

MES INTERFACE
(3) IP address

FUNCTION
Enter a decimal IP address of the server computer where DB Connection Service is
installed.

(4) Port No. (Range: 1024 to 65535, Default: 5112) 6

Set a port number of the server computer.

FUNCTION SETTING
Set the same value in [Port No.] as the one set in [Service port] of DB Connection
MES INTERFACE
Service.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

(5) User name (Up to 30 characters) 7

Set a user name used to access the server computer.
For characters that can be used for user names, refer to the following:
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants, etc.

(a) When [Database server] is selected for [Server type]

Set a user name that is required for ODBC access.

(b) When [Application server] is selected for [Server type]

8
Set the account user name used for the operating system (OS) of the application
TROUBLESHOOTING

server computer.

6.6 Server Service Settings

6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings
6 - 19
 (6) Password/Confirm password (Up to 30 characters)
Set a password used to access the server computer.
For characters that can be used for passwords, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants, etc.

(7) Access error notification setting

(a) [Notify the access error status.]
Set whether to enable or disable notification of the access error status.
If the [Notify the access error status.] box is checked, an error occurred in access
to the server computer is reported to a tag component.

(b) When [Notify the access error status.] is selected, choose a tag component into
whose device the access error status data is stored.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.
Data type of tag
Description
component
OFF: Normal/Not accessed/Network line disconnected
Bit
ON: Access error status
"0": Normal/Not accessed/Network line disconnected
String
"1": Access error status
0: Normal/Not accessed/Network line disconnected
Other than the above
1: Access error status

(8) Connection timeout (Range: 1 to 180 seconds, Default: 10 seconds)

In case a connection error occurs on the network between the GOT and the server
computer, set a timeout time during which the GOT will detect the error.
Usually, this setting is not needed.
In any of the following cases, adjust the connection timeout time if necessary.

(a) Reduce the connection timeout time to:

• Make the time elapsed from occurrence of a connection error to the start of
DB buffering shorter.
• Make the time elapsed from occurrence of a connection error to notification of
an access error and job cancellation shorter.

(b) Increase the connection timeout time when:

• A connection timeout occurs in spite of normal network condition.

Point
The relation of the values set for [Connection timeout] and [DB access timeout
time] in [DB Connection Service Setting Tool] must be as follows:
• Connection timeout value DB access timeout value

6 - 20 6.6 Server Service Settings

6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings
 1
6.7 Job Settings

OVERVIEW
Configure the settings for the DB interface function.
For the DB interface function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1 DB Interface Function
2
1 Double-clicking [Job settings] in the Edit items tree displays relevant items.

CONFIGURATION
2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.

SYSTEM
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
Point MES INTERFACE
(1) How to add, delete, or copy an item
For addition, deletion or copying of items, refer to the following:
Section 6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
(2) When an item is added or copied, a "New Job" item is added. 7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.7 Job Settings 6 - 21

 6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings

Up to 64 items can be set in [Job settings] within one project.

For job operations, refer to the following:
Section 5.3 Precautions

6 - 22 6.7 Job Settings

6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings
 1
Item Description
Job name Enter a job name. (Up to 16 characters)

OVERVIEW
GOT Initializing Set whether to enable the job at startup of the GOT or not.
Trigger buffering Set whether to enable the trigger buffering or not.
Startup logging Set whether to output the startup history of the job to the log or not.
Test mode Set whether to operate the job in test mode or not. 2
Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job.
Trigger conditions
Section 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions

CONFIGURATION
Configure the action settings.
Action
Section 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

SYSTEM
Configure the settings for the program execution function.
Program execution
Section 6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
Configure the settings for the DB buffering function.
3
DB buffering
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

SPECIFICATIONS
Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors (job cancellation) that
Notify errors (job
occur during job execution.
cancellation) that occur
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job
during job execution
execution
No. of fields in project Displays the total number of fields in the project.
Tag component data length
4
Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job.

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

in job

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
(1) Job name (Up to 16 characters)
Enter a job name.
For characters that can be used for job names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable 5
names, etc.

MES INTERFACE
(2) GOT Initializing

FUNCTION
(a) Set whether to enable the job at startup of the GOT or not.
If the [GOT Initializing] box is not checked, the job is disabled at startup of the
GOT. (Even if trigger conditions are met, the job is not executed.) 6
(b) When the GOT is ON, the enable/disable setting of the job can be changed in

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
[Change Job Status] on the [Diagnosis] tab.
Section 6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change job status)

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.7 Job Settings

6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings
6 - 23
 (3) Trigger buffering
(a) Set whether to enable the trigger buffering function or not.
For the trigger buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.5 Trigger buffering function

(b) Precautions for enabling [Trigger buffering]

• [Handshake operation] cannot be selected for the trigger conditions.
• A tag component cannot be selected for the substitution tag in [Operation
action].
• Tag component values cannot be set for [DB-tag link setting] in [Select] of
[Communication action].
• [Communication action] - [MultiSelect] cannot be selected.
• Up to 4096 words can be used for the total data length of tag components in
one job. (The current data length is displayed on the status bar of [Job
setting].)

Point
The total data length of tag components in one job is the total data length of tag
components set in [Communication action] and [Operation action]. In
[Communication action], tag components are set in [Select/Update conditions]
and [DB-tag link setting].
All tags in one job are treated as different tags even if there are the same tags.

(4) Startup logging

(a) Set whether to output the startup history of the job to the log or not.
If this function is enabled, the job startup timing can be checked during system
start-up or tune-up.
When the [Startup logging] box is checked, the startup history of the job (date and
time, job name, trigger conditions) is saved on a CF card.
The startup log can be confirmed in [Job Execute Log] on the [Working log] tab.
Section 6.11.2 Job Execute Log

(b) When the log capacity becomes full (Log capacity: 1MB 2)
The first half of the data are deleted.
The latest log is stored after the remaining data.

(c) When this function is enabled, a processing time is required for saving or deleting
the startup history of the job.
It is recommended to disable this function during system operation.

6 - 24 6.7 Job Settings

6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings
 1
(5) Test mode

OVERVIEW
(a) Set whether to operate the job in test mode or not.
Up to 4 jobs can be set to [Test mode].
When the [Test mode] box is checked, the test mode is activated, and execution
details of the job can be confirmed before operation. 2
Job execution can be confirmed in [Job Execute Log] on the [Working log] tab.

CONFIGURATION
(b) When [Test mode] is selected
The following are performed in the test mode.

SYSTEM
Operations other than the following are identical to the actual operations.
• Startup data are logged.
• Detailed data are logged. 3
• Data are not written to GOT devices.
• No data are written to the database.

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.7 Job Settings

6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings
6 - 25
 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions

Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job.

The job is activated when the trigger condition value is changed from false to true.
At the time of power-up, at restart of the MES interface function, or at the end of one-shot
execution, all the conditions are initialized to false, and the job is started up when the initial
condition is true.

Item Description
Combination Selects conjunction of Trigger 1 and 2.
Trigger 1 Selects Trigger 1.
Trigger 2 Selects Trigger 2.

6 - 26 6.7 Job Settings

6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
 1
(1) Combination

OVERVIEW
(a) Selects a combination of [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2].
• OR (When either of them is true, the result is true.)
• AND (When both of them are true, the result is true.)
When the combination result of [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2] is changed from false to 2
true, the job is activated.

CONFIGURATION
(b) The following shows the timings at which the combination result of [Trigger 1] and
[Trigger 2] is changed from false to true.

SYSTEM
(In any other cases, because the combination result is not changed from false to
true, the job is not activated.)
3
Combination Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Combination result
(Changed from false to (Remained false)

SPECIFICATIONS
true)

True True
False False 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

(Changed from false to (Changed from false to

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
true) true)
OR (When either of them is
true, the result is true.)
True True
False False

(Remained false) (Changed from false to

5
true)

MES INTERFACE
(Changed from false

FUNCTION
True True
to true)
False False

(Changed from false to (Remained true)

true) True 6
False

FUNCTION SETTING
True True MES INTERFACE

False False
(Changed from false to (Changed from false to
true) true)
7
AND (When both of them
are true, the result is true.)
True True
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

False
SERVICE AND

False

(Remained true) (Changed from false to

true)

8
True True
TROUBLESHOOTING

False False

6.7 Job Settings

6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
6 - 27
 (2) Trigger 1, Trigger 2
Select items for [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2], referring to this section (3) and subsequent
descriptions.

Item Description Trigger 1 Trigger 2

No trigger conditions
Disable
This section (3) Disable
When the specified date, time and day of the
week match the actual date, time and day of
the week, the condition changes from false to
Time specification startup
true, resulting in job startup.
This section (4) Time specification
startup
The condition is alternated between true and
false in the specified cycles (unit: seconds),
Specified time period and when it changes from false to true, the job
startup is activated.
This section (5) Specified time period
startup
The actual tag component value is compared
with the condition value (tag component value
or constant value) at every sampling times,
Value monitoring startup
and the job is activated when the condition
changes from false to true.
This section (6) Value monitoring startup
The job is activated only once when the GOT
GOT Initializing is started up.
This section (7) GOT Initializing
The job is activated when [Handshake startup]
of the GOT turns ON.
Handshake operation Upon completion of the job execution,
[Completion notification] of the GOT turns ON.
This section (8) Handshake operation

: Selectable, : Not selectable

(3) Disable
(a) When [Disable] is selected for [Trigger 1] or [Trigger 2]
Another trigger is regarded as a trigger condition.

(b) When [Disable] is selected for both [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2]

The job is not activated by trigger conditions.
The job can be executed only by one-shot execution.

6 - 28 6.7 Job Settings

6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
 1
(4) Time specification startup

OVERVIEW
(a) When the specified date, time and day of the week match the actual date, time
and day of the week, the condition changes from false to true, resulting in job
startup.
2
(b) When [Time specification startup] is selected, the date, time, and day of the week
must be set.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3
1) Year, Month, Day, Hour, and Minute
Directly enter the date and time.

SPECIFICATIONS
Matching with the actual date and time is not checked for any field that remains
blank.

Item Description
Year (4 digits) 0000 to 9999 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Month 1 to 12

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

Day 1 to 31

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Hour 0 to 23
Minute 0 to 59

2) Day:
Specify a day of the week. 5
Check the checkbox of the day to be specified.
If no box is checked, it means "every day".

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(Example) The following shows that the job is to be activated at 17:30 on
Monday through Friday.
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

(Example) The following shows that the job is to be activated at 9:00 on the 1st
day of every month.
7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Point 8
If [Startup logging] is selected, each job startup can be confirmed with the time to
the second in the startup log.
TROUBLESHOOTING

The startup log can be checked on the [Working log] tab.

Section 6.11 Working Log

6.7 Job Settings

6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
6 - 29
 (5) Specified time period startup
(a) The condition is alternated between true and false in the specified cycles (unit:
seconds), and when it changes from false to true, the job is activated.

(b) When [Specified time period startup] is selected, set the cycle.
(Range: 1 to 32767 seconds)

(Example)
The following shows that the job is activated at 60-second intervals for an hour
from 12:00 to 13:00 every day.

(6) Value monitoring startup

(a) The actual tag component value is compared with the condition value (tag
component value or constant value) at every sampling times, and the job is
activated when the condition changes from false to true.
Even if the trigger condition becomes true temporarily between samplings, the job
is not activated unless it is true at time of sampling.

Startup point
Startup point
Condition value

Not activated here.

Tag compon

Sampling interval

6 - 30 6.7 Job Settings

6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
 1
(b) When [Value monitoring startup] is selected, specify conditions for comparison.

OVERVIEW
1) Tag, Component
2
Select a tag component to be compared with.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.

CONFIGURATION
2) Condition
Select a condition for comparison.

SYSTEM
=
Item Description
The tag component value is equal to the condition value.
3
The tag component value is not equal to the condition value.

SPECIFICATIONS
The tag component value is equal to or greater than the condition
value.
(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit] or
[String])
The tag component value is greater than the condition value.
(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit] or 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

[String])

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

The tag component value is smaller than the condition value.

INTERFACE FUNCTION
(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit] or
[String])
The tag component value is equal to or smaller than the condition
value.
(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit] or
[String])
5
3) Tag/Type

MES INTERFACE
Select a tag or constant that is used as a condition for comparison.

FUNCTION
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
4) Component
Select or enter a component/constant value that is used as a condition for
6
comparison.

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.7 Job Settings

6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
6 - 31
 (Example)
The following shows that the job is activated when the value of the tag
component (Process 1, Temperature) reaches 45 or higher.

(Example)
To activate the job repeatedly while the condition of [Value monitoring startup]
is met,
Make settings as follows:

Item Description
Combination AND (When both of them are true, the result is true.)
Trigger 1, Trigger 2 [Value monitoring startup], [Specified time period startup]

As the condition alternates between true and false as shown below, job startup
can be repeated while the [Value monitoring startup] condition is met.

Tag component value

[Trigger 1] Timing of [Value monitoring startup]
Condition value

True
Sampling interval
False

[Trigger 2] Timing of [Specified time period startup]

True

False

Fixed cycle

Combined by AND

Timing when AND is used

Startup point

True

False

6 - 32 6.7 Job Settings

6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
 1
(7) GOT Initializing
The job is activated only once when the GOT is started up.

OVERVIEW
(8) Handshake operation
(a) The job is activated when [Handshake startup] of the GOT turns ON. 2
Upon completion of the job execution, [Completion notification] of the GOT turns
ON.

CONFIGURATION
[Handshake operation] is a startup method by which completion of job execution

SYSTEM
can be notified to a GOT.

Sampling interval 3
GOT
Handshake operation started

SPECIFICATIONS
ON
[Handshake startup]
OFF

ON
[Completion notification]
OFF
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
Handshake operation completed

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Device data

Job operation 5
Data

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
1 When [Handshake startup] turns ON in the sequence program, the GOT collects
tag component values used for the job and executes the job.
6
2 Upon completion of the job execution, [Completion notification] of the GOT is

FUNCTION SETTING
turned ON.*1
MES INTERFACE
3 After confirming that [Completion notification] is ON, turn OFF [Handshake
startup] of the GOT.

4 When [Handshake startup] turns OFF, the GOT turns OFF [Completion
7
notification], causing the handshake operation to be completed.

5 After confirming the completion of the handshake operation, the next job is
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

executed.

*1 If an error occurs during job execution, [Completion notification] does not turn ON.
To detect such an error, enable [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution].
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution
8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.7 Job Settings

6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
6 - 33
 (b) [Handshake operation] is selectable only in [Trigger 1].
When [Handshake operation] is selected, selection is not allowed for [Trigger 2].
For selection of [Handshake operation], set the following items.

Item Description
Select a tag component used to request for job startup.
(Selectable only when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit])
Handshake startup
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be
selected.
Select a tag component that allows notification of execution
completion of the job.
Completion notification *1 (Selectable only when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit])
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be
selected.

*1 Do not specify the same [Completion notification] to multiple jobs.

6 - 34 6.7 Job Settings

6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
 1
6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution

Configure the settings for the program execution function.

OVERVIEW
For the program execution function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.9 Program execution function
2
1 Click the Setting button of [Before actions] or [After actions].
• Before actions:

CONFIGURATION
Set a program to be performed before execution of the first action of the job.
• After actions:

SYSTEM
Set a program to be performed after execution of the last action of the job.

SPECIFICATIONS
2 [Program execution setting (before action)] or [Program execution setting (after
action)] is displayed.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

After completing the setting, click the button.

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

OK

INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.7 Job Settings

6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
6 - 35
 Item Description
Execute program before Set whether or not to enable program execution before or after execution
(after) action of actions.
Program execution
Select an application server to be accessed.
destination
Enter a command line for the program that is executed on the application
Command line
server computer. (Up to 127 characters)
Check return value Set whether to check the return value or not.
Wait for execution Set whether or not to wait for execution completion of the program before
completion executing the next processing.

(1) Execute program before action, or Execute program after action

(a) Set whether or not to enable program execution before or after execution of
actions.

(b) When [Execute program before action] or [Execute program after action] is
enabled, make the setting described in this section (2) and subsequent sections.

(2) Program execution destination

Select an application server to be accessed.

(3) Command line (Up to 127 characters)

Enter a command line for the program that is executed on the application server
computer.*1*2
For characters that can be used for command lines, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.1 ASCII code table
*1 Programs that need to be run with administrator privileges (by a user in Administrators group) are
not executable.
*2 To execute a program including any displays, place the application server computer into the logon
status.

6 - 36 6.7 Job Settings

6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
 1
(4) Check return value

OVERVIEW
(a) Set whether to check the return value or not.
When the [Check return value] box is checked, the return value (End code) of the
executed program is checked.
If no return value is returned within the [DB access timeout] time set in DB 2
Connection Service Setting Tool, a timeout error is detected and the job execution
is canceled.

CONFIGURATION
For [DB access timeout], refer to the following:

SYSTEM
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

(b) When [Check return value] is selected, set the following items.
1) Normal return value (Default: 0)
3
Set a normal return value.

SPECIFICATIONS
2) Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty.
When the [Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty] box is checked,
if the return value is not normal, a value is assigned to the specified tag
component.
Set a tag component to which a value is assigned when this is selected. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

• Tag, Component

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
• Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.
3) Do not execute job when the value is faulty. ([Program execution setting 5
(before action)] only)
When the [Do not execute job when the value is faulty] box is checked, if the

MES INTERFACE
return value is faulty, the job execution is canceled.

FUNCTION
(5) Wait for execution completion
If the [Wait for execution completion] box is checked, the next processing is executed 6
after completion of the program execution.
When [Check return value] is selected, [Wait for execution completion] is always

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
selected.

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.7 Job Settings

6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
6 - 37
 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not.

For the DB buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.10 DB buffering function

Item Description
Enable DB buffering Set whether to enable the DB buffering or not.
Set whether or not to automatically resend data after recovery.
When the [Automatically resend at time of restoration] box is checked,
Automatically resend at
resend processing is automatically performed after recovery.
time of restoration
When the [Automatically resend at time of restoration] box is not checked,
resend processing is manually performed after recovery.

Point
Before resending data, the GOT communicates with the database.
At this time, if an action for communicating with the same database is set for a job,
a long time is required for execution of the job.
In the case of a large buffering size, it is advisable to resend the data manually
while any job that is set to communicate with the database is not in execution, so
that no problem will arise even if the MES interface function processing is
affected.

6 - 38 6.7 Job Settings

6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
 1
6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution

Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors (job cancellation) that occur during

OVERVIEW
job execution.
Job execution is canceled when access to the database fails or when type mismatch is
found. 2
Section 5.2 SNTP Time Synchronization Function
Section 6.12 Precautions

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3
(1) Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution

SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors (job cancellation) that occur
during job execution.
When [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution] box is
checked, if job execution is canceled, a value is assigned to the specified tag
component. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
(b) When [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution] has been

INTERFACE FUNCTION
selected, set a tag component to which a value is assigned.

1) Tag, Component
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
5
2) Substitute value

MES INTERFACE
Directly enter a substitute value.

FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.7 Job Settings

6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution
6 - 39
 6.7.6 One-shot execution

Execute a job as a one-shot task.

Doing so allows the user to check the execution result of the currently editing [Job setting].

(1) Procedure for one-shot execution

Point
• In [One-shot execution], settings of [Startup logging] and [DB Buffering]
are not executed.
• All of job operations running with the MES interface function are
temporarily disabled during one-shot execution.

1 Click the One-shot execution button with the [Job settings] edit screen displayed.

2 Clicking the One-shot execution button performs one-shot job execution ignoring the
trigger conditions.

3 Check the execution result shown in the [View details] dialog box, which is displayed
after the execution.
For the display of the [View details] dialog box, refer to the following:
Section 6.11.2 (3) Updating the Job Execute Log

Remark
A dialog box indicating the current processing status is displayed until completion
of one-shot execution.

6 - 40 6.7 Job Settings

6.7.6 One-shot execution
 1
(2) Precautions for one-shot execution

OVERVIEW
(a) Precautions before one-shot execution
One-shot execution can be performed only when the MES interface function is
active.
When the MES interface function is not active, check the status and restart the 2
operation before starting one-shot execution.
For restart of the MES interface function, refer to the following:

CONFIGURATION
Section 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation)

SYSTEM
(b) Precautions during one-shot execution
Do not perform the following during one-shot execution.
• Do not disconnect the cable that is connected to the GOT during one-shot 3
execution.
Doing so will cause the MES interface function to be inoperative.

SPECIFICATIONS
• Do not remove the CF card from the GOT during one-shot execution.
Doing so will cause the MES interface function to be inoperative.
If the MES interface function becomes inoperative, check the status and restart
the operation on the Diagnosis tab. 4
For restart of the MES interface function, refer to the following:

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
Section 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation)

INTERFACE FUNCTION
(c) Precautions after one-shot execution
One-shot execution results are not reflected in [Connection result of previous job
execution].
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.7 Job Settings

6.7.6 One-shot execution
6 - 41
 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

The following shows types of actions.

Up to 10 actions can be set for one job.
• [Communication action]
For communicating the GOT with a database
• [Operation action]
For operating tag component values
• [Transmit resource action]
For sending the resource data to the database

(Adding an action)
• Select [Communication action], [Operation action], or [Transmit resource action]
from the list box next to the Add button, and click the Add button.

• The Communication action dialog box, the Operation action dialog box, or the
Transmit resource action dialog box is displayed.
• Section 6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
• Section 6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
• Section 6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action

(Modifying an action)
• Select an action to be modified in [Action list], and click the Edit button.

• The Communication action dialog box, the Operation action dialog box, or the
Transmit resource action dialog box is displayed.
• Section 6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
• Section 6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
• Section 6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action

(Deleting an action)
• Select an action to be deleted in [Action list], and click the Delete button.

(Copying an action)
• Select an action to be copied in [Action list], choose [Replicate the selected action]
from the list box next to the Add button, and click the Add button.

6 - 42 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

 1
(Copying an action of another job within the project)

1 Select [Replicate actions of other jobs] in the list box next to the Add button, and

OVERVIEW
click the Add button.

2 The [Replicate actions] dialog box is displayed.

2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
3 By repeating the following steps 4 to 6 , set copy targets in [Selected Actions to
replicate].
5
4 From [Source Jobs], select a job that includes a desired action.

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5 Actions of the job selected in 4 are listed in [Source Actions]. Select an action to
be copied. (Multiple selection is available.)
6
6 Clicking the > button displays the action(s) selected in 5 in [Selected Actions to

FUNCTION SETTING
replicate].
MES INTERFACE

Item Description
Puts the action(s) selected in [Source Actions] into [Selected Actions
> button to replicate].
Puts all of the actions in [Source Actions] into [Selected Actions to
7
>> button replicate].
DB CONNECTION

Deletes the action(s) selected in [Selected Actions to replicate] from

SETTING TOOL

< button
SERVICE AND

the box.
Deletes all of the actions in [Selected Actions to replicate] from the
<< button box.

7 Clicking the Run button executes copying.

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

8 Copied actions are located after existing actions.

6.8 Job Settings - Actions 6 - 43

 Item Description
Type The types of the existing actions are displayed.
Summary Details of the existing actions are displayed.
Selecting an action in [Action list] and clicking the button reverses the
button order between the selected one and the one immediately above it.
The button cannot be clicked on the first action.

Selecting an action in [Action list] and clicking the button reverses the
button order between the selected one and the one immediately below it.
The button cannot be clicked on the last action.

Point
When more than one action are set, they are executed in order, starting from the
top.

(1) Type
The types of the existing actions are displayed.

Item Description
Select [Select] of [Communication action]
Update [Update] of [Communication action]
Insert [Insert] of [Communication action]
MultiSelect [MultiSelect] of [Communication action]
Operation [Operation action]
Resource [Transmit resource action]

6 - 44 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

 1
(2) Summary
Details of the existing actions are displayed.

OVERVIEW
(a) In the case of [Communication action]

Item Description
2
[Database: Table name]{DB-tag link setting No.1}...{DB-tag link setting No.n}

CONFIGURATION
Display format*1
• Select: {DB-tag link setting} = {Field name -> Tag component/Constant value}
• Update/Insert: {DB-tag link setting} = {Field name <- Tag component/Constant value}

SYSTEM
(b) In the case of [Operation action]
3
Item Description
{Operation action No.1}...{Operation action No.n}

SPECIFICATIONS
• With substitution setting:
{Operation action} =
Display format*1 *2 {Substitution tag component/Constant value <- Operation tag component/Constant value Operator
Operation tag component/Constant value}
• Without substitution setting:
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

{Operation action} =

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
{Substitution tag component/Constant value <- Operation tag component/Constant value}

(c) In the case of [Transmit resource action]

Item Description
[Database: Table name]{Comment storing field name, Time storing field name, Field name No.1, ..., Field 5
Display format
name No.n}

MES INTERFACE
*1 Display format of the tag component/constant value

FUNCTION
Item Description
Tag component Device tag name, component name
Numerical value Numerical value 6
String "Character string"

FUNCTION SETTING
GOT time: Date [GOT time]
MES INTERFACE
Date
Server time: Date [Server time]
Date String "Date [Date String]"
Variable (Variable name)
*2 Display format of the operator
7
Item Description
+ (Addition) +
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

- (Subtraction) -
SERVICE AND

(Multiplication)
(Division)
% (Remainder) %
8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions 6 - 45

 6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action

Configure the settings for communications with a database.

1 Performing the operation for adding or modifying an action displays the

[Communication action] dialog box.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
Clicking the OK button after setting adds or modifies the action.
For the operation for adding or modifying an action, refer to the following:
Section 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

Item Description
Action type Select an action type.
Database Select a database to be accessed.
Table name Set a table name of the database to be accessed.
Set assignments between field values and tag component values (or
DB-tag link settings*1
constant values).
When [Select], [Update] or [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type], set
Select/Update conditions*1
conditions for the records to be selected or updated.
When [Select] or [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type], set a
Select sort settings*1
condition for sorting selected records.
Set the processing to be performed in the following cases:
No corresponding record exists when [Select], [Update], or [MultiSelect]
is selected for [Action type].
Exception process setting Multiple corresponding records exist when [Select] or [Update] is
selected for [Action type].
button
The number of records to be multi-selected is greater than the number of
arrays set in [Array setting] of the tag when [MultiSelect] is selected for
[Action type].

Multi select setting When [MultiSelect] is selected, detailed settings can be configured by
clicking this.
button

(To the next page)

6 - 46 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1
(From the previous page)
Item Description
Displays SQL text that is generated in the currently editing

OVERVIEW
Generated SQL text
[Communication action].
No. of fields in project Displays the total number of fields in the project.
Tag component data length in
job
Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job.
2
Selecting a row and clicking the button reverses the order between
the selected row and the one immediately above it.

CONFIGURATION
button
The button cannot be clicked on the first row.

SYSTEM
Selecting a row and clicking the button reverses the order between
button the selected row and the one immediately below it.
The button cannot be clicked on the last row. 3
Delete row button Selecting a row and clicking the Delete row button deletes the row.
• All of the tags set in [Device tag settings] are inserted into [Tag] and

SPECIFICATIONS
[Component].
• Select a row into which data are inserted and choose a tag in a list box
next to the Insert a whole tag button. Clicking the
Insert a whole tag button
Insert a whole tag button inserts all of the tag components into 4
contiguous rows starting from the selected one.

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
• The existing data set in the rows starting from the selected one are

INTERFACE FUNCTION
moved down.

*1 Up to 8192 fields can be set in [DB-tag link settings], [Select/Update conditions] and [Select sort
settings] for each project.
(Check [No. of fields in project] in the lower left of the Communication action dialog box.)

5
Remark

MES INTERFACE
(1) Entry of [Component]

FUNCTION
When data are entered in [Component] by [Insert a whole tag] or with the
[Field name] space blank, the data are copied to the [Field name] space.
(Characters not allowed for [Field name] are not entered.)
6
Because of this, setting the same name to each of the field name and tag
component name is useful.

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 47
 (1) Action type
Select an action type.
Item Description
[Select] substitutes a field value of the record, whose conditions are
Select *1
met, for a substitute value (tag component value/variable).
[Update] substitutes a substitute value (tag component value/
Update *1 *2
variable) for a field value of the record whose conditions are met.
Generates a new value, and inserts an insert value (tag component
Insert
value/constant value/variable) into a field of the generated record.
Substitutes field values of the records, whose conditions are met, for
MultiSelect*1
substitute values (tag component values).

*1 Cannot be selected when the database is Wonderware Historian.

*2 With Access 2000 or Access 2003, the following restrictions exist.
• Up to 127 fields can be updated for a communication action.
• Do not access the same file with multiple GOTs and MES interface modules simultaneously.

(2) Database
Select a database to be accessed.

(3) Table name (1 to 32 characters)

Set a table name of the database to be accessed.
For characters that can be used for table names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.

(4) DB-tag link settings

Set assignments between field values and tag component values (or constant
values).
Up to 256 rows can be set in [DB-tag link settings] for each communication action.

6 - 48 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1
(a) When [Select] is selected for [Action type]
[Select] substitutes a field value of the record, whose conditions are met, for a

OVERVIEW
substitute value (tag component value/variable).
Set conditions of the record to be selected in [Select/Update conditions].
This section (5) Select/Update conditions
Conditions for sorting the selected records are set in [Select sort settings].
2
This section (6) Select sort settings

CONFIGURATION
1) Field name (1 to 32 characters)
Set a field name for the field value to be selected.

SYSTEM
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
2) Tag
3
Select a tag or variable for which a value is substituted.

SPECIFICATIONS
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
3) Component
Select or directly enter a component value or a variable of the substitution
target.
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
Database: DB1, Table name: RecipeData
Work_No RECIPE1 RECIPE2 RECIPE3

536 5 32 1 7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

Matched Selected Selected Selected

SERVICE AND

Tag component
Process1.Work_No Process1.RECIPE1 Process1.RECIPE2 Process1.RECIPE3
536 5 32 1
8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 49
 (b) When [Update] is selected for [Action type]
[Update] substitutes a substitute value (tag component value/variable) for a field
value of the record whose conditions are met.
Set conditions of the record to be updated in [Select/Update conditions].
This section (5) Select/Update conditions
1) Field name (1 to 32 characters)
Set a field name for the field value to be updated.
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
2) Tag
Select a tag, constant, or variable which is substituted.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
3) Component
Select or directly enter a Component value or a variable that is to be
substituted.

Database: DB1, Table name: CompletionReport

Work_No Completed Rejected Date
: : : :
536 496 32 2005.07.01 15:12:00

Matched Updated Updated Updated

Tag component
Process1.Work_No Process1.Complete Process1.Rejected Constant: Server time
536 496 32 2005.07.01 15:12:00

6 - 50 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1
(c) When [Insert] is selected for [Action type]
[Insert] generates a new record, and inserts an insert value (tag component value/

OVERVIEW
constant value/variable) into a field of the generated record.
1) Field name (1 to 32 characters)
Set a field name for the field value to be inserted.
2
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.

CONFIGURATION
2) Tag
Select a tag, constant, or variable which is substituted.

SYSTEM
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
3) Component 3
Select or directly enter a Component value or a variable that is to be
substituted.

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
Database: DB1, Table name: ERRORLOG
Date Process No Work_No Parameter

2005.07.01 15:12:00 1 536 8

7
Inserted Inserted Inserted Inserted
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

Tag component
SERVICE AND

Constant: GOT time Constant: 1 Process1.Work_No. Process1.Parameter

2005.07.01 15:12:00 1 536 8

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 51
 4) When the database is Wonderware Historian, the following is inserted as
one record to the database by executing [Communication action].
• Date and time when a communication action is executed
• Tag name set for [Field name]
• Tag component value or constant value set for [Component]
When multiple fields are set, the number of records to be inserted is equivalent
to that of fields.

Database: InSQL Table name: History (fixed)

Datatime TagName Value
Field name Tag component Inserted

AnalogTag1 Equipment1Analog1 2006-10-20 15:30:00 AnalogTag1 10

AnalogTag2 Equipment1Analog2 2006-10-20 15:30:00 AnalogTag2 20
AnalogTag3 Equipment1Analog3 2006-10-20 15:30:00 AnalogTag3 30

6 - 52 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1
(d) When [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type]
[MultiSelect] substitutes field values of the records, whose conditions are met, for

OVERVIEW
substitute values (tag component values).
Conditions for the redords to be selected are set in [Select/Update conditions].
This section (5) Select/Update conditions
Conditions for sorting the selected records are set in [Select sort settings].
2
This section (6) Select sort settings

CONFIGURATION
1) Field name (Up to 32 characters)
Set a field name for the field values to be multi-selected.

SYSTEM
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following.
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
2) Tag
3
Select a target tag.

SPECIFICATIONS
Only the tags with [Array setting] can be selected.
3) Component
Select a target component.

Point 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

When [MultiSelect] is used in a job, the total of [Tag component data length in job]

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
must be 45000 words or less.
[Tag component data length in job] represents a total length of the tag component
data set for the following:
• [DB-tag link settings] in [Communication action]
• [Select/Update conditions] in [Communication action] 5
• [Operation action]
Even if the same tag component is set more than once in the same job, each

MES INTERFACE
setting is handled separately.

FUNCTION
(The number of settings can be confirmed on the status bar of [Job setting], or in
the [Communication action] or [Operation action] dialog box.)

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 53
 Database: DB1, Table name: RECIPEDATA
Work_No RECIPE_A RECIPE_B RECIPE_C

: : : :

536 5 32 1
537 6 33 0
538 7 34 1
539 8 35 0
540 9 36 1

Select-sorted Matched
Selected Selected
(Ascending) (RECIPE_C=1)

Tag component
Process1.Work_No[1] Process1.RECIPE_A[1] Process1.RECIPE_B[1] Process1.RECIPE_C[1]

536 5 32 1

Process1.Work_No[2] Process1.RECIPE_A[2] Process1.RECIPE_B[2] Process1.RECIPE_C[2]

538 7 34 1

Process1.Work_No[3] Process1.RECIPE_A[3] Process1.RECIPE_B[3] Process1.RECIPE_C[3]

540 9 36 1

6 - 54 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1
(e) About tag components
Tag component values can be used as substitute/insert values for [Select],

OVERVIEW
[Update], [Insert] or [MultiSelect], or as condition values of [Select/Update
conditions].
The following table lists data types of tag components and those of assignable
fields. 2
If the data type of a tag component does not match the one of its substitution
target field, an error occurs, resulting in cancellation of job execution.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Point
The data type of a tag component will change through operation processing of a 3
job.
Section 6.12 (3) Type mismatch

SPECIFICATIONS
Data type of assignable field

Data type of tag Oracle 8i

SQL Server 2000/2005 Access 2000 Wonderware
4
component

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Oracle 9i
MSDE 2000 Access 2003/2007 Historian

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

Oracle 10g

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Bit type Yes/No type Discrete Tag
bit
Byte type
int
Integer type
smallint
Long integer type
(Numeric type: Integer)
NUMBER
CHAR
tinyint
float
Single type 5
Single-precision type Double type Analog Tag(Integer)
VARCHAR real
Double-precision type AutoNumber type
char

MES INTERFACE
Currency type
varchar
Text type*1 *2

FUNCTION
text*1
Memo type*1 *2
float
Single type
(Numeric type: Floating NUMBER real
Double type 6
point) CHAR char *1 *2 Analog Tag(Real)
Text type
Floating-point type *3 VARCHAR varchar

FUNCTION SETTING
Memo type*1 *2
MES INTERFACE
*1
text
char
CHAR Text type *2
Character string varchar String Tag
VARCHAR Memo type *2
text*1

*1 Not available for [Select/Update conditions] 7

*2 Memo-type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used. (For Microsoft Access 2007)
*3 Values are assigned with precision of six decimal digits.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 55
 (f) About constants
Constants can be used as substitute/insert values for [Update] or [Insert], or as
condition values of [Select/Update conditions].
The following table lists constant types and the data types of assignable fields.
If the type of a constant does not match the data type of its substitution target
field, an error occurs, resulting in cancellation of job execution.

Data type of assignable field

Values that can be entered in Oracle 8i SQL Server Access 2000

Constant type Wonderware
[Component] Oracle 9i 2000/2005 Access 2003/
Historian
MSDE 2000 2007
Oracle 10g
Yes/No type
bit *1 Byte type
Up to 16 characters
int *1 Integer type Discrete Tag
• Signed decimal notation (Example: -
smallint *1 Long integer type Analog
[Number] 521.98) NUMBER
Single type Tag(Integer)
• Signed exponential notation (Example: - tinyint *1
Double type Analog Tag(Real)
5.2198E03) float
AutoNumber type
real
Currency type
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for char
CHAR Text type *5
[String] character strings, refer to the following: varchar String Tag
VARCHAR *3 Memo type *5
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to text
character string constants, etc.
• When using the date and time of the
database server:
datetime
[Date] *2 Select [Server time]. DATE Date/Time type -*4
smalldatetime
• When using the date and time of the GOT:
Select [GOT time].
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for
character strings, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to
character string constants, etc.
Specify the date and time of the GOT in the
following format.
char
Year (4 digits): YYYY CHAR Text type *5
[Date String] varchar String Tag
Year (2 digits): YY VARCHAR Memo type *5
*3
text
Month (2 digits): MM
Day (2 digits): DD
Hour (2 digits): hh
Minute (2 digits): mm
Second (2 digits): ss
Example: "YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss"
"2005-07-01 15:12:00"

*1 Signed integer notation only

*2 Clock precision:
When [GOT time] is selected: In units of seconds
When [Server time] is selected: Depends on the database server.
*3 Not available for [Select/Update conditions]
*4 With Wonderware Historian, only [GOT time] is assigned.
*5 Memo-type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used. (For Microsoft Access 2007)

6 - 56 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1
(g) About variables
Variables can be used as substitute/insert values for [Select], [Update] or [Insert],

OVERVIEW
or as condition values of [Select/Update conditions].
The following table lists data types of variables and those of assignable fields.
If the type of a variable does not match the data type of its substitution target field,
an error occurs, resulting in cancellation of job execution. 2
Up to 64 variables can be set for one job.

CONFIGURATION
Point

SYSTEM
(1) A variable is valid only in a single job execution and is not held.
(2) The initial variable value before substitution processing is the numerical value 3
of zero.
(3) The data type of a variable will change through operation processing of a job.

SPECIFICATIONS
Section 6.12 (3) Type mismatch

Data type of assignable field

4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Values (variable names) that can Oracle 8i SQL Server Access 2000
Data type of variable

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

be entered in [Component] Wonderware
Oracle 9i 2000/2005 Access 2003/

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Historian
MSDE 2000 2007
Oracle 10g
Bit type Yes/No type Discrete Tag
bit
Byte type
int
Integer type
smallint
tinyint
Long integer type 5
NUMBER Single type
(Numeric type: Integer)
CHAR float Analog
Single-precision type Double type
real

MES INTERFACE
Up to 16 characters. VARCHAR AutoNumber type Tag(Integer)
Double-precision type
For characters that can be used for char
Currency type

FUNCTION
variables, refer to the following: vachar
Text type *1*2
Appendix 1.2 Characters text *1
Memo type *1*2
applicable to item names,
component names, variable
float
Single type 6
(Numeric type: Floating NUMBER real
names, etc. Double type

FUNCTION SETTING
point) CHAR char Analog Tag(Real)
Text type *1*2
MES INTERFACE
Floating-point type *3 VARCHAR vachar
Memo type *1*2
text *1
char
CHAR Text type*2
Character string vachar String Tag
VARCHAR Memo type*2
text *1 7
*1 Not available for [Select/Update conditions]
*2 Memo-type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used. (For Microsoft Access 2007)
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

*3 Values are assigned with precision of six decimal digits.

SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 57
 (5) Select/Update conditions
When [Select], [Update] or [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type], set conditions for
the records to be selected, updated or multi-selected.
When a field value of a record matches a condition value, the record is selected or
updated.
Up to 8 rows can be set for one communication action in [Select/Update conditions].

Point
Exception processing is executed when records that meet [Select/Update
conditions] are in the following cases.
• Records to be selected/updated/multi-selected do not exist.
• Multiple records exist for select/update.
• The number of records to be multi-selected is greater than the number of
arrays set in [Array setting] of the tag.
For details of the exception processing, refer to the following.
This section (7) Exception processing setting

(a) Combine
Select a method by which conditions set in respective lines are combined.
Select "AND" or "OR".
If "AND" and "OR" are combined, the database will process "AND" first and then
"OR".

Item Description
The condition of the line just above the corresponding line and the
AND
condition of the corresponding line
The condition of the line just above the corresponding line or the
OR
condition of the corresponding line

(b) Field name (1 to 32 characters)

Set a field name that is used for comparison.
For characters that can be used for field and table names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.

6 - 58 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1
(c) Condition
Select a condition for comparison.

OVERVIEW
Item Description
The field value is equal to the condition value.
The field value is not equal to the condition value. 2
The field value is equal to or greater than the condition value.

CONFIGURATION
The field value is greater than the condition value.
The field value is smaller than the condition value.

SYSTEM
The field value is equal to or smaller than the condition value.

(d) Tag 3
Select a tag or constant that is used as a condition for comparison.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.

SPECIFICATIONS
(e) Component
Select or directly enter a component/constant value that is used as a condition for
comparison.
If [Variable] is selected for [Tag], select or directly enter a variable. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
Point

INTERFACE FUNCTION
For tag components, constants or variables, refer to the following:
• This section (4)(e) About tag components
• This section (4)(f) About constants
• This section (4)(g) About variables 5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 59
 (6) Select sort settings
When [Select] or [MultiSelect] is selected in [Action type], set conditions for sorting the
records to be selected/multi-selected.
If multiple sort conditions are set, the database will process the conditions in order,
starting from the top.
In [Select sort settings], settings of up to eight lines are allowed for each
communication action.

(a) Field name (Up to 32 characters)

Set a field name for records to be selected.
For characters that can be used for field names and table names, refer to the
following.
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.

(b) Order
Set the order of sorting the selected records.
Item Description
Sorts the records so that the specified fields are arranged in
Ascending order
ascending order.
Sorts the records so that the specified fields are arranged in
Descending order
descending order.

6 - 60 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1
Data base (before sorting)
ORDER_NO PRODUCT_CODE DELIVERY_DATE

OVERVIEW
200 707 2007-01-31
201 662 2007-01-10
202 666 2007-01-29
2
203 662 2007-01-31
204 707 2007-01-10

CONFIGURATION
205 666 2007-01-29
206 707 2007-01-10

SYSTEM
207 662 2007-01-29
208 662 2007-01-31
3
Sorting conditions in [Select sort settings]

SPECIFICATIONS
1)
2)

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Selected records [sorting results]
ORDER_NO PRODUCT_CODE DELIVERY_DATE
206 707 2007-01-10

2) 204 707 2007-01-10 5

201 662 2007-01-10
207 662 2007-01-29

MES INTERFACE
2) 205 666 2007-01-29

FUNCTION
202 666 2007-01-29
208 662 1) 2007-01-31

2) 203 662 2007-01-31 6

200 707 2007-01-31

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
1) First, selected records are sorted in ascending order of DELIVERY_DATE.
2) Then, records of the same DELIVERY_DATE are sorted in descending order of ORDER_NO.

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 61
 (7) Exception processing setting
A click on the Exception process setting button displays the [Exception process
setting] dialog box.
(Example) When [Select] is selected for [Action type]

(a) Exception processing: No applicable record

When [Select], [Update] or [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type], set
processing for the case where there is no record to be selected, updated or multi-
selected.

1) Send notification of this exception

When the [Send notification of this exception] box is checked, if there is no
record to be selected, updated or multi-selected, assign a value to the
specified tag component.
When [Send notification of this exception] is selected, set a tag component to
which the value is assigned.
• Tag, Component
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
• Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.
2) Continue this job
After execution of exception processing described in the above 1), the system
continues executions of other actions.
3) Finish this job (Default: Finish this job)
After execution of exception processing described in the above 1), the job is
forcibly terminated without executing remaining actions.
At this time, substitute/insert values before exception processing execution are
committed, and they are written to relevant tag components.

6 - 62 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1

Point
(1) When a job is forcibly terminated, an error occurred during job execution (job

OVERVIEW
cancellation) is not notified.
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job
execution 2
(2) If [Enable DB buffering] is selected for a job, its exception processing setting
is disabled.

CONFIGURATION
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

SYSTEM
(b) Exception processing: Multiple applicable records
When [Select] or [Update] is selected for [Action type], set processing for the case 3
where there are multiple records to be selected or updated.

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
1) Select firster find records (Default: Checked)
When [Select] is selected for [Action type], checking the [Select firster find
records] box allows extraction of the head record from multiple applicable
records.
When this checkbox is not checked, the select/update processing is not 5
performed.

MES INTERFACE
Point

FUNCTION
When [Update] is selected for [Action type], if multiple records to be updated exist,
all of them are updated.
6

FUNCTION SETTING
2) Send notification of this exception
MES INTERFACE
When the [Send notification of this exception] box is checked, if multiple
records to be selected or updated exist, assign a value to the specified tag
component.
When [Send notification of this exception] is selected, set a tag component to 7
which the value is assigned.
• Tag, Component
DB CONNECTION

Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
• Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.
3) Continue this job
8
After executions of exception processing described in the above 1) and 2), the
TROUBLESHOOTING

system continues executions of other actions.

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 63
 4) Finish this job (Default: Finish this job)
After execution of exception processing described in 1) and 2), the job is
forcibly terminated without executing remaining actions.
At this time, substitute/insert values before exception processing execution are
committed, and they are written to relevant tag components.

Point
(1) When a job is forcibly terminated, an error occurred during job execution (job
cancellation) is not notified.
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job
execution
(2) If [Enable DB buffering] is selected for a job, its exception processing setting
is disabled.
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

(c) Exception processing: Applicable records overflow

When [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type], set processing for the case where
the number of records to be selected is greater than the number of arrays set in
[Array setting].

1) Select firster find records (Default: Checked)

When the [Select firster find records] checkbox is checked, if the number of
records selected by [Select/Update conditions] is greater than the number of
arrays set in [Array setting], records equivalent to the number of arrays are
actually selected.
When this checkbox is not checked, the select processing is not performed.

Remark
If the [Select firster find records] checkbox is not checked, the following is per-
formed.
• When [Notify the number of acquired records] is set in [Multi select setting], 0 is
notified.
• When [Clear the unused tag components by zero] is set in [Multi select setting],
0 is assigned.
This section (8) Multi select setting

6 - 64 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1
2) Send notification of this exception
If the [Send notification of this exception] checkbox is checked, a value is
assigned to the specified tag component when the number of records selected

OVERVIEW
by [Select/Update conditions] is greater than the number of arrays set in [Array
setting].
[Array setting] is less than the number of records selected by [Select/Update 2
conditions].
When selecting this, set a tag component to which a value is assigned.

CONFIGURATION
• Tag, Component
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.

SYSTEM
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
• Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.
3
3) Continue this job

SPECIFICATIONS
After executions of exception processing described in the above 1) and 2), the
system continues executions of other actions.
4) Finish this job (Default: Finish this job)
After executions of exception processing described in the above 1) and 2), the
system forcibly terminates the job without executing other actions.
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

At this time, substitute/insert values before execution of the exception

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
processing are committed to the database, and data written to tag component
are updated.

Point
(1) When a job is forcibly terminated, an error occurred during job execution (job 5
cancellation) is not notified.
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job

MES INTERFACE
execution

FUNCTION
(2) If [Enable DB buffering] is selected for a job, its exception processing setting
is disabled.
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering 6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 65
 (8) Multi select setting
A click on the Multi select setting button displays the [Multi select setting] dialog box.
Complete the setting, referring to the following explanation

(a) Specify the maximum number of acquiring records

If the [Specify the maximum number of acquiring records] checkbox is checked,
records of up to the specified number are acquired.
The GOT acquires the records in the order that the records are extracted from the
database.
When selecting this, set a tag for which a value is specified.
1) Tab/Type
Select a tag for which a value is specified.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
2) Component
Select or directly enter a component or a constant value to be specified.

Item Values available for Component

[Number] Within the range of 1 to 40000
Device tag Single- or double-precision type tag component

Point
(1) When the select sort settings are set, the GOT acquires the records in the set
sorting orders.
(2) An error occurs if the specified tag component value is 0 or less.
Section 5.3 (2) When an error occurs in job execution

(b) Send notificcation of selected record number

When the [Notify the number of acquired records] checkbox is checked, the
number of actually acquired records is notified to the specified tag component.
When selecting this, set a tag component to which a value is notified.
• Tag
Select a tag component to which a value is notified.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.

6 - 66 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
 1
(c) Clear the unused tag components by zero
When the [Clear the unused tag components by zero] checkbox is checked, if the

OVERVIEW
specified number of arrays of the tag component is less than the number of
actually acquired records, zeros are assigned to other array areas.

(Example) 2
When the specified number of arrays of the tag component is "6" and the number
of actually acquired records is "4":

CONFIGURATION
Component name Device Data type n=1 n=2 n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6

SYSTEM
Component A GB0 Bit Component A GB0 9 GB1 4 GB2 7 GB3 1 GB4 0 GB5 0
Component B GD10 Double word Component B GD10 482 GD12 623 GD14 769 GD16 154 GD18 0 GD20 0
Component C GD100 String (10 characters) Component C GD100 Table GD105 Data1 GD110 Data2 GD115 Data3 GD120 "" GD125 ""
3
Acquired records "0" is assigned to
unassigned tag

SPECIFICATIONS
components. ("Null" for
the character string
type)

(9) Generated SQL text

The SQL text generated by the currently editing [Communication action] is displayed. 4
It indicates the display format of the tag component/constant value.

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
Note that data of Tag component, Date, Date String, and Variable are generated at job

INTERFACE FUNCTION
execution, and displayed in the format shown below. (It is different from the actual
SQL text.)
Actions of [Select] and [MultiSelect] generate SQL texts with SELECT. With the SQL
text, the user cannot identify which action is executed.
5
Item Description
Tag component '(Device tag name, component name)'

MES INTERFACE
Numerical value 'Number'

FUNCTION
String 'String'
GOT time:
TO_DATE('( Date and time [YYYYMMDDhhmmss])',
Oracle 8i
'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS') 6
Server time: sysdate
GOT time:

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
Oracle 9i TO_DATE('( Date and time [YYYYMMDDhhmmss])',
Oracle 10g 'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS')
Date Server time: CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
SQL Server
2000/2005
MSDE2000
GOT time: '( Date and time [YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss])' 7
Server time: CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
Wonderware
Historian
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Access 2000 GOT time: '( Date and time [YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss])'
Access 2003/2007 Server time: NOW()
Date String '(Date[String])'
Variable '(Variable name)'
8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 67
 6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action

Configure the settings for operation of tag component values.

Up to 20 dyadic operations can be set for one operation action.

1 Performing the operation for adding or modifying an action displays the [Operation
action] dialog box.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
Clicking the OK button after setting adds or modifies the action.
For the operation for adding or modifying an action, refer to the following:
Section 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6 - 68 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
 1
Item Description
Select a tag or variable to which a value is assigned.
Substitution tag
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.

OVERVIEW
Select or directly enter a component value or a variable of the substitution
Component
target.
Select a tag, constant, or variable which is computed.
Operation tag
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected. 2
Select or directly enter a component/constant value or a variable that is to
Component
be computed.

CONFIGURATION
Select an operator.
Operator [ ] (None), [+] (Addition), [-] (Subtraction), [ ] (Multiplication), [ ]

SYSTEM
(Division), [%] (Remainder)

Selecting a row and clicking the button reverses the order between the
button selected row and the one immediately above it. 3
The button cannot be clicked on the first row.

SPECIFICATIONS
Selecting a row and clicking the button reverses the order between the
button selected row and the one immediately below it.
The button cannot be clicked on the last row.

Delete row button Selecting a row and clicking the Delete row button deletes the row.
Tag component data length 4
Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job.

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

in job

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Point
Operation actions are executed in order, from the top to the bottom.
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
6 - 69
 (1) About constants
Constants can be used for [Operation tag] - [Component] and not for [Operator].
The following shows the constant types and values that can be entered in the
[Component] column.

Constant type Values that can be entered in [Component]

Up to 16 characters
[Number] • Signed decimal notation (Example: -521.98)
• Signed exponential notation (Example: -5.2198E03)
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the following:
[String]
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants,
etc.
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants,
etc.
Specify the date and time of the GOT in the following format.
Year (4 digits): YYYY
[Date String] Year (2 digits): YY
Month (2 digits): MM
Day (2 digits): DD
Hour (2 digits): hh
Minute (2 digits): mm
Second (2 digits): ss
Example: "YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss" "2005-07-01 15:12:00"

(2) About variables

Variables can be used for [Component] of [Substitution tag] or [Component] of
[Operation tag].
By using a variable, a value computed in [Operation action] can be assigned to a
database, or to a tag component (In the latter case, operation is performed based on
a value extracted from the database).
The following table shows the variable types and values that can be entered in the
[Component] column.
Up to 64 variables can be set for one job.

Point
(1) A variable is valid only in a single job execution and is not held.
(2) The initial variable value before substitution processing is the numerical value
of zero.
(3) The data type of a variable will change through operation processing of a job.
Section 6.12 (3) Type mismatch

Variable type Values (variable names) that can be entered in [Component]

Up to 16 characters
For characters that can be used for variables, refer to the following:
[Variable]
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component
names, variable names, etc.

6 - 70 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
 1
(3) Setting example of [Operation action]
The following is a case in which correction power is calculated using a correction

OVERVIEW
voltage and it is assigned to a tag component (Process 1.Correction power).
The tag component value (Process 1.Correction power) obtained from the following
[Operation action] is: 2
(Process 1.Voltage 100 + 50) Currrent

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
6 - 71
 6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action

Configure the settings for sending the resource data collected in a GOT to a database.

Point
Before setting [Transmit resource action], configure the settings to collect the
resource data (the logging setting, the advanced user alarm observation, the
advanced system alarm observation, and the operation log setting).
For details, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
The settings for collecting the resource data must be matched to the settings for
the resource data send action. When the settings are not matched, an error may
occur at the job execution.

Item Description
Action type Select an action type.
Database Select a database to be accessed.
Table name Select a table name of the database to be accessed.
Resource type Select a resource data type.
Set the assignments between the resource data to be sent and the field
Field name setting*1
value for the database.
Clicking this button checks that the settings for collecting the resource
data are matched to the settings for the resource data send action.
Confirm setting button An error message is displayed when the settings are not matched.
For the displayed error message, refer to the following.
Section 6.12 Precautions
Set the logging ID for the logging setting or the alarm ID that is set on the
Logging ID/Alarm ID
advanced alarm observation.
Clicking the Set operation log file name button displays the stored
Operation log file
location for the operation log data to be sent.
(To the next page)

6 - 72 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
 1
(From the previous page)
Item Description
Range of data Specify the number of resource data to be sent for each action.

OVERVIEW
Displays the SQL text that is generated during editing the data for
Generated SQL text
[Transmit resource action].

*1 Up to 8192 fields can be set in [Field name setting] for each project.
(Check [No. of fields in project] in the lower left of the Communication action dialog box.)
2

(1) Action type

CONFIGURATION
Select an action type.

SYSTEM
The selectable action type is the insert only.

Item Description
Insert Generates a new record, and assigns a value (resource data) into a field.
3
(2) Database

SPECIFICATIONS
Select a database to be accessed.

(3) Table name (1 to 32 characters)

Set a table name of the database to be accessed. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

When the selected database is Wonderware Historian, the table name is fixed to

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

[History].

INTERFACE FUNCTION
For characters that can be used for table names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.

(4) Resource type 5

(Default: Logging)
Select a resource data type.

MES INTERFACE
Item Description

FUNCTION
Device values of a controller that are collected at any timing or in
Logging
specified intervals.
Alarm data that are collected in specified intervals for the advanced user
Advanced user alarm
alarm observation setting 6
Alarm data for controllers and a network that are collected by the
Advanced system alarm

FUNCTION SETTING
advanced system alarm observation setting
Operation log GOT operation history data collected by the operation log function MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 73
 (5) Field name setting
Set the assignments between the resource data to be sent and the field values for the
database.
The resource data types vary according to [Resource type].
(Example) Screen for settings of sending logging data

1)
4)
2) 5)

3) 6)

Item Description
*1
1) First row (comment)
A field name for sending a comment to the database can be set.
2) Second row (time)*1
Field name*3*5 A field name that specifies a date and time for a resource data send
(0 to 32 characters) action can be set.
3) Third row or later (resource data)
A field name for sending the resource data to the database can be set.
Input the field name for [Insert data] to be sent.
4) First row (0 to 32 characters, Default: Comment)*1*4
The comment to be inserted into the database can be set.
5) Second row (Default: GOT time)
The date and time for inserting the data to the database can be
selected from [GOT time] or [Server time].
6) Third row or later (resource data)
The list of resource data to be inserted to the database is displayed.
Insert data*2 This section (5)(a) When selecting [Logging] for [Resource type]
This section (5)(b) When selecting [Advanced user alarm] for
[Resource type]
This section (5)(c) When selecting [Advanced system alarm] for
[Resource type]
This section (5)(d) When selecting [Operation Log] for [Resource
type]
*1 When setting [Field name], fields for the stroring comment and the time data are created in the
database. (The setting for the field name is not necessarily required.)
*2 When [Field name] is not inputted, no resource data is sent.
*3 For the types of data to be sent in the fields, refer to the following.
This section (5)(e) Data types
*4 For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants, etc.
*5 For characters that can be used for field and table names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.

6 - 74 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
 1
The following shows the resource data to be sent and the types of the data.

(a) When selecting [Logging] for [Resource type]

OVERVIEW
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Insert data Data type
Logging time Date
LoggingDevice (1 to 250)*1 Numeric type (Integer, floating point)
*1 The numbers of 1 to 250 correspond to the rows set for the number of the block number in the 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

logging setting.

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
(b) When selecting [Advanced user alarm] for [Resource type]

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
Insert data Data type
Alarm time Date
Alarm status Character string
General comment*1 Character string 7
*1 Character string
Middle comment
*1 Character string
Higher comment
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Detail comment*1 Character string

*1 The first column data of the column number set in the comment group is sent.

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 75
 Point
Up to 512 of one-byte and two-byte characters can be set in a comment for the
advanced user alarm.
Set the length of character string on the database more than that for the comment.

(c) When selecting [Advanced system alarm] for [Resource type]

Insert data Data type

Alarm time Date
Alarm status Character string
Comment Character string

Point
Up to 512 of one-byte and two-byte characters can be set in a comment for the
advanced system alarm.
Set the length of character string on the database more than that for the comment.

6 - 76 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
 1
(d) When selecting [Operation Log] for [Resource type]

OVERVIEW
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Insert data*1 Data type
Logging time(DATE) Date
Log No.(NO) Numeric type (Integer)
Screen No.(SCRN_NO) Character string
Action type(ACT_ABBR) Character string 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Action type(ACTION) Character string

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

Object name(OPNAME) Character string

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Operation level(OPERATOR) Character string
Operation level(OPE_ID) Numeric type (Integer)
User ID(USER_ID) Numeric type (Integer)
Action No.(ACT_NO) Numeric type (Integer)
Data type(DATA_TYPE) Character string 5
Device name(DEV_NAME) Character string
Change value(CHG_VALUE) Character string

MES INTERFACE
Previous value(PREV_VALUE) Character string
*1 The data to be sent vary according to the operation log target.

FUNCTION
For details of the collected data in the operation log, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 77
 (e) Data types
The following table shows the data types of resource data and the data types of
data to be sent in the field.
When the data type of the resource data does not match that of data to be sent in
the field, an error occurs, resulting in the cancellation of the job execution.

Data type of data to be sent in field

Data type of resource Oracle 8i

SQL Server 2000/2005 Access 2000
data Oracle 9i Wonderware Historian
MSDE 2000 Access 2003/2007
Oracle 10g
datetime
Date DATE Date/Time type String Tag
smalldatetime
char
CHAR Text type*1
Character string varchar String Tag*2
VARCHAR Memo type*1
text
Yes/No type
bit Byte type
int Integer type
smallint Long integer type Discrete Tag
NUMBER tinyint Single type Analog Tag(Integer)
Numeric type CHAR float Double type Analog Tag(Real)
VARCHAR real AutoNumber type String Tag
char Currency type
varchar
Text type*1
text
Memo type*1

*1 Memo-type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used. (For Microsoft Access 2007)
*2 With Wonderware Historian, only [GOT time] is sent.

(6) Logging ID/Alarm ID

When selecting [Logging] or [Advanced user alarm] for [Resource type], set the
logging ID of logging data or the alarm ID for advanced user alarm data.

6 - 78 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
 1
(7) Operation log file
The GOT displays the operation log file when [Operation log] is selected for

OVERVIEW
[Resource type] only.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Clicking the Set operation log file name button displays the stored location for the
operation log file. 3
The GOT can send the displayed operation log file to the database.
Inputting the data directly to [Drive Name], [Folder Name], and [File Name] are not

SPECIFICATIONS
available.

Point
When the operation log settings are changed after setting [Transmit resource
4
action], click the Set operation log file name button to set the operation log file

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
again.

INTERFACE FUNCTION
The settings for [Operation log file] are not automatically changed.
When the displayed data on [Operation log file] does not exist, an error occurs at
the job execution.

5
(8) Range of data

MES INTERFACE
Specify the maximum number of resource data to be sent for one resource data send
action.

FUNCTION
When [Operation Log] is selected for [Resource type], [Range of data] is fixed to
[Latest data (days specified)].
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
Item Description
Specify the maximum number of resource data collected in the GOT after the
Latest data
DB CONNECTION

last action.
SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

(No. specified)
(Range:1 to 99999, Default:1)
Specify the time period from the job execution time to the specified time for
Latest data
sending the collected resource data.
(time specified)*1
(Range:1 to 99999, Default:1 (seconds))
Specify the number of days including in the date at the job execution for sending
8
Latest data the resource data. (This item cannot be specified for sending the logging data,
TROUBLESHOOTING

(days specified)*1 the advanced user alarm data, and the advanced system alarm data.)
(Range:1 to 400, Default:1 (days))
All data All the resource data collected in the GOT after the last action.
For details of *1, refer to the following.

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 79
 *1 Resource data to be sent after changing the GOT time and date
When changing the GOT time, the resource data to be sent may differ from the resource data to be
sent without changing the GOT time.
The following shows the resource data to be sent after changing the GOT time and date.

(1) Logging data

(a) Executing the next action before the time of the last action
Example 1) Changing the time from 11:40 to 11:10, and executing the next action at 11:20
: Time specified (300 seconds)

GOT time

Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the last action>
(last action) A:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
A B

(11:25) 11:30 11:40

Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the next action>
C
(next action) B:Data collected after the last action until changing
11:10 11:20 the GOT time
C:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
Changing GOT time

(b) Executing the next action after the time of the last action
Example 1) Changing the time from 11:40 to 11:20, and executing the next action at 11:35
: Time specified (300 seconds)

GOT time

Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the last action>
(last action) A:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
A B D

(11:25) 11:30 (11:35) 11:40

Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the next action>
C
(next action) B,C:Data collected for the specified time (300
Changing GOT time 11:20 11:35 seconds)
D:Data collected after the time of the next action (in
the previous GOT time setting)

Example 2) Changing the time from 11:58 to 12:58, and executing the next action at 13:00
: Time specified (300 seconds)

GOT time

Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A (last action) A:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)

(11:25) 11:30 11:58

Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the next action>
B
(next action) B:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
Changing GOT time 12:58 13:00

6 - 80 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
 1
(2) Advanced user alarm data/advanced system alarm data
(a) Executing the next action before the time of the last action
(The GOT does not send all the data collected after the last acton.)
Example 1) Changing the time from 11:40 to 11:00, and executing the next action at 11:20

OVERVIEW
: Time specified (300 seconds)

GOT time
2
Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A (last action) A:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)

CONFIGURATION
(11:25) 11:30 11:40

SYSTEM
Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the next action>
(next action) No data
11:00 11:20 3
Changing GOT time

SPECIFICATIONS
(b) Executing the next action after the time of the last action
Example 1) Changing the time from 11:40 to 11:20, and executing the next action at 11:35
: Time specified (300 seconds)

GOT time
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the last action>

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

(last action) A:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)

INTERFACE FUNCTION
A B

(11:25) 11:30 (11:35) 11:40

Sending resource data

C* <Resource data to be sent for the next action>
(next action) Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds) 5
Changing GOT time 11:20 11:35 B:Data collected before changing the GOT time
C:Data collected after changing the GOT time

MES INTERFACE
* The data collected before the last action are not sent by the next action even though the data is
collected within the specified time.

FUNCTION
(3) Operation log data
(a) Executing the next action before the time of the last action
(The GOT does not send all the data collected after the last acton.)
6
Example 1) Changing the time from 0:40 to 23:40 on the previous day, and executing the

FUNCTION SETTING
next action at 23:50
: Days specified (1 day) MES INTERFACE

GOT time

7
Changing date Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A (last action) A:Data collected for the specified day (1 day)

0:30 0:40
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Sending resource data

<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
(next action)
No data
23:40 23:50
Changing GOT time
8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 81
 Example 2) Changing the time from 0:40 to 0:10 on the same day, and executing the next
action at 0:20
: Days specified (1 day)

GOT time

Changing date Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A (last action) A:Data collected for the specified day (1 day)

0:30 0:40

Sending resource data

<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
(next action)
No data
0:10 0:20
Changing GOT time

(b) Executing the next action after the time of the last action
Example 1) Changing the time from 23:40 to 0:10 on the next day, and executing the next
action at 0:20
: Days specified (1 day)

GOT time

Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A (last action) A:Data collected for the specified day (1 day)
Changing date
23:30 23:40

Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the next action>
B
(next action) B:Data collected for the specified day (1 day) after
Changing GOT time 0:10 0:20 the last action

Example 2) Changing the time from 0:40 to 0:50 on the same day, and executing the next
action at 1:00
: Days specified (1 day)

GOT time

Changing date Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the last action>
(last action) A:Data collected for the specified day (1 day)
A B

0:30 0:40

Sending resource data <Resource data to be sent for the next action>
C
(next action) B, C:Data collected for the specified day (1 day)
Changing GOT time 0:50 1:00 after the last action

6 - 82 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
 1

Point
(1) The GOT sends the resource data only one time, regardless of the settings

OVERVIEW
for [Range of data]. The GOT does not send the sent data to the database.
The GOT may send the sent data when restarting the GOT for downloading
the project data and others. 2
Section 6.12 Precautions
(2) When an action fails due to the communication error between the GOT and

CONFIGURATION
the server computer or others, the GOT sends the failed action data at the
next action.

SYSTEM
3
Remark
The time to complete the resource data send action (Reference value (seconds))

SPECIFICATIONS
The following shows the resource data send time for the resource type, and the
number of resource data (100, 500, 1000, 10000).
Under the following conditions, the values for sending data differ from the refer-
ence values in the following table.
• Loads on the GOT or loads on between the GOT and the server computer or
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

others

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
• MES interface function setting

Number of resource data

Resource type
100 500 1000 10000
7 31 59 582
Logging*1*2
(5) (23) (42) (410) 5
Advanced user alarm*3 2 5 8 88
alarm*3 2 5 8 -

MES INTERFACE
Advanced system
Operation log*4 1 5 9 82

FUNCTION
*1 The logging is collected by the buffer historical and the device points set to 250 points and a
100ms cycle for the logging setting.
*2 When collecting data every 100ms cycle is canceled, the value is shown in the parentheses.
*3 When sending the alarm comment with 512 one-byte characters. 6
*4 When the numbers of insert fields are 7 to 13 by one action.

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 83
 (9) Generated SQL text
The SQL (INSERT) text generated by the currently editing data for [Transmit resource
action] is displayed.
The SQL text shows the display type for the resource data, the character string, and
the date.
The GOT does not send the resource data without setting the field name for [Field
name setting]. The data with no field name are not included in the SQL text.
The following table shows the display type for the generated resource data and the
date at the job execution. (The display type differs from the actual data at the job
execution.)

Item Description
*1 'Data name'
Resource data
String 'String'
GOT time:
TO_DATE('(Date and time[YYYYMMDDhhmmss])',
Oracle 8i
'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS')
Server time: sysdate
GOT time:
Oracle 9i TO_DATE('(Date and time[YYYYMMDDhhmmss])',
Date Oracle 10g 'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS')
Server time: CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
SQL Server 2000/2005
MSDE 2000 GOT time: '(Date and time[YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss])'
Server time: CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
Wonderware Historian
Access 2000 GOT time: '(Date and time[YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss])'
Access 2003/2007 Server time: NOW()
*1 For the data name, refer to the following.
This section (5) Field name setting

6 - 84 6.8 Job Settings - Actions

6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
 1
6.9 Option Setting

OVERVIEW
Configure the SNTP time synchronization setting and the DB buffering function setting.

1 Click [Option setting] in the Edit items tree.

2
2 The "option setting" area is displayed on the detailed setting edit screen.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.9 Option Setting 6 - 85

 6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting

Configure the settings for the SNTP time synchronization function.

Time is obtained from the SNTP server computer on the network and used on the GOT.

Point
To synchronize the time between the GOT and other devices on the network,
using the time on the SNTP server computer is recommended.

(1) Synchronize using SNTP

(a) When the [Synchronize using SNTP] box is checked, the time is adjusted to the
time of the SNTP server computer on the network.
The timing is as follows:
• When powering ON the GOT from OFF
• When resetting the GOT
• Once for every interval specified in Sync. Interval

Point
When the GOT time is set to be synchronized with the clock time of another
controller by GT Designer2 and GOT utility, even if the [Synchronize using SNTP]
box is checked, the SNTP time synchronization is not performed.
To use the SNTP time synchronization function, do not set the time adjustment
settings on GT Designer2 or the GOT utility.
For details of the time adjustment settings, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (Section 2.5 Clock Function)

6 - 86 6.9 Option Setting

6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting
 1
(b) When [Synchronize using SNTP] is selected, set the following items.

Item Description

OVERVIEW
SNTP server address Enter the IP address of the SNTP server or NTP server in decimal
(required) notation.
Select a time zone used for time synchronization.
Time zone (required)
Japan Standard Time (GMT+09:00) is selected by default. 2
Set an interval used for time synchronization.
Sync. Interval (required)
Default is 1 minute.

CONFIGURATION
(2) When time information is not obtainable from the SNTP server computer

SYSTEM
When the GOT cannot obtain time information from the SNTP server computer due to
failure of the network or time synchronization server, it behaves as follows:
3
(a) When time information is not obtained at the time of powering ON the GOT from
OFF, or resetting the GOT

SPECIFICATIONS
1) Time synchronization is not performed. (Clock data of the GOT are used as
they are.)
2) An error is output to the MES interface Execute Log.
3) Time query is executed to the SNTP server computer after the interval 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

specified for Sync. Interval.

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
(b) When time information is not obtained once for each interval specified in Sync.
Interval
1) The GOT continues its operations based on the information that was
successfully obtained by time query.
5
2) If the previous time query was successful, an error is output to the MES
interface Execute Log.

MES INTERFACE
3) Time query is executed to the SNTP server computer after the interval

FUNCTION
specified for Sync. Interval.

Point 6
(1) When time query to the SNTP server computer is executed successfully, it
can be also confirmed by the error log.

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
• When succeeded in initial time query
An error code is output to the MES interface Execute Log.
• When failed in previous time query and succeeded this time
An error code is output to the MES interface Execute Log.
(2) The MES interface Execute Log can be checked on the [Working log] tab. 7
Section 6.11 Working Log
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

(3) Precautions on the time synchronization function

(a) Synchronizing time with SNTP server computer
When [Synchronize using SNTP] is selected, an SNTP server computer is 8
required.
TROUBLESHOOTING

Note that the SNTP server computer must have the time synchronization server
function.

6.9 Option Setting

6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting
6 - 87
 6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings

Configure the settings for the DB buffering function.

For the DB buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.10 DB buffering function

(1) DB buffering capacity (Range: 16MB to 512MB, Default: 64MB)

Set the capacity used for DB buffering out of the entire CF card capacity within the
following range.
Maximum capacity = CF card capacity - 32M bytes

(2) DB buffering status

(a) Select a tag component into whose device whether data are currently
accumulated in the DB buffer or not is stored.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.

(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.

Data type of tag
Description
component
OFF : Not accumulated
Bit
ON : One or more data accumulated
“0” : Not accumulated
String
“1” : One or more data accumulated
0 : Not accumulated
Other than the above
1 : One or more data accumulated

6 - 88 6.9 Option Setting

6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
 1
(3) No. of DB bufferings

OVERVIEW
(a) Select a tag component into whose device whether data are currently
accumulated in the DB buffer or not is stored.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
2
(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.
Data type of tag

CONFIGURATION
Description
component
OFF : Not accumulated
Bit

SYSTEM
ON : One or more data accumulated
“0” : Not accumulated
String
1 or greater: Number of buffering data that are accumulated
0 : Not accumulated
3
Other than the above
1 or greater: Number of buffering data that are accumulated

SPECIFICATIONS
(4) Resend DB buffer request
(a) Select a tag component used to request for resend processing of the DB buffer.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

(b) The following explains the operation of the resend processing using [Resend DB

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

buffer request].

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Data type of tag
Description
component
The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when the
specified tag component is ON. 5
Normal: Turns OFF after completion of the resend processing.*1*2
Error:

MES INTERFACE
Outputs an error code to MES interface Execute Log, and turns OFF.

FUNCTION
Bit

Resend DB buffer request

Tag component value
6
DB buffer resend processing Execute resend

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when "1" is written
to the specified tag component.
String Normal: "0" is written after completion of the resend processing.*1*2
Error: 7
Outputs an error to the MES interface Execute Log, and "0" is written.
The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when "1" is written
DB CONNECTION

to the specified tag component.

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Other than the above Normal: "0" is written after completion of the resend processing.*1*2
Error:
Outputs an error to the MES interface Execute Log, and "0" is written.
*1 Do not change the value of the specified tag component until the resend processing is completed. 8
Even if the value changes, the resend processing is not interrupted.
*2 To make another DB buffer resend request after completion of resend processing, wait for a
TROUBLESHOOTING

sampling interval of the specified tag component or more, and then set the device as follows:
• Bit type: ON
• Character string type: "1"
• Other than the above: 1

6.9 Option Setting

6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
6 - 89
 (5) Clear DB buffer request
(a) Select a tag component used to request for clear processing of the DB buffer.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.

(b) The following explains the operation of the clear processing using [Clear DB
buffer request].

Data type of tag

Description
component
The clear processing of the DB buffer is performed when the specified
tag component is ON.
Turns OFF after completion of the clear processing.*3*4

Bit Clear DB buffer request

Tag component value

DB buffer clear
processing Execute clear

The DB buffer is cleared when "1" is written to the specified tag

String component.
"0" is written after completion of the clear processing.*3*4
The DB buffer is cleared when "1" is written to the specified tag
Other than the above
component.
(Including string)
"0" is written after completion of the clear processing.*3*4
*3 Do not change the value of the specified tag component until the clear processing is completed.
Even if the value changes, the clear processing is not interrupted.
*4 To make another DB buffer clear request after completion of clear processing, wait for a sampling
interval of the specified tag component or more, and then set the device as follows:
• Bit type: ON
• Character string type: "1"
• Other than the above: 1

6 - 90 6.9 Option Setting

6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
 1
(6) DB buffering full

OVERVIEW
(a) Select a tag component into whose device the status of whether the DB buffer is
full or not is stored.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
2
(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.
Data type of tag

CONFIGURATION
Description
component
OFF : DB buffer is not full.
Bit

SYSTEM
ON : DB buffer is full.
“0” : DB buffer is not full.
String
“1”
0
: DB buffer is full.
: DB buffer is not full.
3
Other than the above
1 : DB buffer is full.

SPECIFICATIONS
(c) When the DB buffer becomes full, buffering operation will be stopped.
After buffering operation is stopped, even if a job for which DB buffering is
enabled is activated, its SQL texts are discarded without being buffered.
Execution of a job for which DB buffering is enabled is not canceled.
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Point

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Check [DB buffer utilization] shown in this section (7) to prevent the "DB buffer
full" status.

(7) DB buffer utilization 5

(a) Select a tag component into whose device the utilization of the DB buffer area

MES INTERFACE
(unit: %) is stored.

FUNCTION
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.

(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.

Data type of tag
Description
6
component

FUNCTION SETTING
OFF : Not accumulated
Bit
MES INTERFACE
ON : One or more data accumulated
“0” : Not accumulated
String
Other than "0": Utilization of DB buffer area (Unit: %)
0 : Not accumulated
Other than the above
Other than 0: Utilization of DB buffer area (Unit: %)
7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.9 Option Setting

6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
6 - 91
 6.10 Diagnosis

Perform the remote diagnosis for the MES interface function.

1 Click the [Diagnosis] tab.

2 The [Diagnosis] sheet is displayed.

3 Operate it referring to the following descriptions.

6 - 92 6.10 Diagnosis
 1
6.10.1 Checking the MES Interface Function status (Status)

The operation status of the MES interface function can be checked.

OVERVIEW
The following explains the display of [Status].
The display of [Status] is updated every 3 seconds.
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Display Description
Running The MES interface function is working normally.
The MES interface function is stopped. 3
Stopped Even if trigger conditions are met, no job will be executed during stop of
the function.

SPECIFICATIONS
The GOT is in process of powering from OFF to ON, or resetting.
Initializing Even if trigger conditions are met, no job will be executed during
initialization.
The MES interface function is starting up after processing of the above
Starting Initializing status.
Even if trigger conditions are met, no job will be executed during startup. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Stopping The MES interface function is being stopped.

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

The MES interface function setting screen is attempting to acquire the

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Getting status
status from the MES interface function.
The MES interface function setting screen failed to connect to the MES
Connection failed
interface function and could not acquire the status.
The MES interface setting has not been done, or the MES interface
Error
function is stopped due to an error. 5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.1 Checking the MES Interface Function status (Status)
6 - 93
 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation)

The operation status of the MES interface function can be manipulated.

(1) Stop

1 Selecting the [Stop] radio button and clicking the Execute button stops the
operation of the MES interface function.

Point
If a job is in execution, the MES interface function will stop upon completion of the
job.
For completion of a job in which a communication error has occurred, refer to the
following:
Section 5.3 (c) When actions are set for a job

(2) Restart

1 Selecting the [Restart] radio button and clicking the Execute button restarts the
operation of the stopped MES interface function.

6 - 94 6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation)
 1
6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change job status)

The job status can be changed.

OVERVIEW
Point
The job status changed by this operation returns to the status set in [Job settings] 2
by powering OFF and ON or resetting the GOT.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
1 From [Job list], select the job whose status is to be changed.

2 Select a checkbox of the status to be changed.

5
Item Description
• Checked

MES INTERFACE
The job is enabled and thereby it is executed when the trigger

FUNCTION
conditions are met.
Enable job
• Not checked
The job is disabled, and thereby it is not executed even if the
trigger conditions are met. 6
• Checked
The startup logging is enabled, and thereby startup records are

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
logged.
Enable startup logging *1
• Not checked
The startup logging is disabled, and thereby startup records are
not logged.
• Checked
The detailed logging is enabled, and thereby detailed records are 7
logged.
Enable detailed logging *2
• Not checked
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

The detailed logging is disabled, and thereby detailed records are

SERVICE AND

not logged.
• Checked
Disable writing to GOT Writing to PLC devices is disabled.
device • Not checked 8
Writing to PLC devices is enabled.
TROUBLESHOOTING

• Checked *3
Writing to the database is disabled.
Disable writing to database
• Not checked
Writing to the database is enabled.

6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change job status)
6 - 95
 *1 The startup log can be confirmed in [Job Execute Log] on the [Working log] tab.
Section 6.11.2 Job Execute Log
*2 [Enable detailed logging] is selectable only when [Test mode] is selected in [Job settings].
Section 6.7.1 (5) Test mode
When [Enable detailed logging] is checked, [Enable startup logging] is also selected.
The detailed log can be confirmed in [Job Execute Log] on the [Working log] tab.
Section 6.11.2 Job Execute Log
*3 When [Disable writing to database] is checked, the following processing are executed.
• The SQL text is sent to a database, and then the rollback is executed at the last.
Errors occur when the server service settings and the settings for the actions in [Job settings],
including table names and field names, are incorrect.
When an error occurs, check the settings.
• With Wonderware Historian, the following SQL text is sent because the rollback cannot be
used.
INSERT INTO History (Data Time, TagName,Value) SELECT TOP 0 NULL.
NULL. NULL:
Errors occur when the server service settings are incorrect.
When an error occurs, check the server service settings.
No error occurs even though the settings for the action in [Job settings] are incorrect.

3 Clicking the Execute button changes the job status.

6 - 96 6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change job status)
 1
6.10.4 Checking the connection of the previous job execution (Connection
result of previous job execution)

OVERVIEW
Connection with the server computer set in [Server service settings], which is made at the
time of the previous job execution, can be checked.
The following explains the display of [Connection result of previous job execution]. 2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Displayed result Description
Normally connected to the server computer at the time of the
4
Connected

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

previous job execution.

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Initial status (Not connected to the database server computer), or
Disconnected normal connection could not be established at the previous job
execution and thereby the line was disconnected.

Point 5
• The display of the connection result is not changed until the next job is
executed to communicate the database server computer.

MES INTERFACE
• The result of the one-shot communication with the database server
computer is not reflected.

FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.4 Checking the connection of the previous job execution (Connection result of previous job execution)
6 - 97
 6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)

Operate the DB buffering.

For the DB buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.10 DB buffering function

(1) Number of bufferings and Buffer utilization

This section explains checking the number of data buffered, the current buffer
utilizations, and the highest buffer utilizations of the DB buffering function.

Description
Display
Current value Highest value*2
Shows the current number of bufferings Shows the number of bufferings (number
No. of bufferings *1
(number of buffered jobs). of buffered jobs) in the past.
Shows the highest buffer utilization in the
Buffer utilization *1 Shows the current buffer utilization.
past.
*1 A value is not displayed when the value is being obtained or could not be obtained.
*2 Any of the following operation clears the highest value.
• Power off the GOT.
• Reset the GOT (when changing the communication settings, etc.)
• Install the OS from GT Designer2
• Download project data, etc.
• Restart the MES interface function
• One-shot execution
Note that the highest value is not cleared if the MES interface function was stopped by the
diagnostics function.

(2) Resending data stored in the DB buffer

1 Clicking the Resend button executes the resend processing of the SQL texts
stored in the DB buffer, when manual resend is selected for the jobs of the SQL
texts.
If resend processing fails, an error will be output to the MES interface Execute
Log.

(3) Clearing the DB buffer

1 Clicking the Clear button clears all of the SQL texts that are stored in the DB
buffer.

6 - 98 6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)
 1
6.10.6 Checking the trigger buffering (Trigger buffering status)

This section explains checking the number of data buffered, the current buffer utilizations,

OVERVIEW
and the highest buffer utilizations of the trigger buffering function.
For the trigger buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.5 Trigger buffering function 2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3
Description
Display

SPECIFICATIONS
Current value Highest value*2
Shows the current number of bufferings Shows the number of bufferings
No. of bufferings *1
(number of buffered jobs). (number of buffered jobs) in the past.
*1 A value is not displayed when the value is being obtained or could not be obtained.
*2 Any of the following operation clears the highest value.
• Power off the GOT.
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

• Reset the GOT (when changing the communication settings, etc.)

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

• Install the OS from GT Designer2

INTERFACE FUNCTION
• Download project data, etc.
• Restart the MES interface function
• One-shot execution

Point 5
When a large number of data is buffered, check the number of job settings and the
trigger condition setting.

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.6 Checking the trigger buffering (Trigger buffering status)
6 - 99
 6.11 Working Log

The operation log of the MES interface function can be checked.

In [Working log], the MES interface Execute Log and the Job Execute Log of the GOT can
be checked.

1 Click the [Working log] tab.

2 The [Working log] sheet is displayed.

3 Click the Acquire button.

4 Log data are displayed.

5 Operate this screen referring to the following descriptions.

6 - 100 6.11 Working Log

 1
6.11.1 MES Interface Execute Log

(1) The MES interface function execution log is displayed.

OVERVIEW
Data displayed in the MES Interface Execute Log are shown below.
Item Description
Date Displays the date and time on which an error occurred. 2
Displays an error code of the error occurred.
Error code For error codes, refer to the following:

CONFIGURATION
Section 8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
Summary Displays an error message.

SYSTEM
(2) Updating the MES interface Execute Log
3
1 Clicking the Acquire button updates the MES interface Execute Log.

SPECIFICATIONS
(3) Clearing the MES interface Execute Log

1 Clicking the Clear button clears the historical data in the MES interface Execute 4
Log.

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.11 Working Log

6.11.1 MES Interface Execute Log
6 - 101
 6.11.2 Job Execute Log

This area displays event log data of the jobs whose executions have been completed.
There are two kinds of Job Execute Log data: [Startup log] and [Detailed log], by which the
job startup history and job execution details can be checked respectively.

(1) Startup log

Startup log data of the jobs, each of which has [Startup logging] setting in [Job
settings], are displayed.
Section 6.7.1 (4) Startup logging
The following explains the display of the Startup log.

(a) Icon
The completion status of the job is displayed as an icon in the Job Execute Log
area.
The following explains the status of each icon.
Icon Description

The job was completed normally. (No detailed log)

The job was completed normally. (With detailed log)

Selecting the job and clicking the View details button displays
the [View details] dialog box.

The job was canceled. (No detailed log)

The job was canceled. (With detailed log)

Selecting the job and clicking the View details button displays the
[View details] dialog box.

(b) Date
The date and time of job startup is displayed.

(c) Job name

Started jobs are displayed.

(d) Summary
Trigger instructions are displayed.

Display Description
Start Shows that any job other than handshake operation was activated.
Handshake start Shows that job execution of handshake operation was activated.
Handshake end Shows that job execution of handshake operation was completed.

6 - 102 6.11 Working Log

6.11.2 Job Execute Log
 1
(2) Detailed log
Detailed log data of the jobs, each of which has [Test mode] setting in [Job settings],

OVERVIEW
are displayed.
Section 6.7.1 (5) Test mode
2
Point
Do not remove the CF card from the GOT during detailed log output.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
1 Selecting a job of or icon and clicking the View details button displays the
[View details] dialog box.
3
2 The following explains the display of the [View details] dialog box.

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Item Description 6
Displays a list of executed job actions.
Action list
Selecting an action displays its action details.

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
Program execution result Displays a program execution result before execution of the first
(before action) action.
Program execution result
Displays a program execution result after execution of the last action.
(after action)
Action details *1 *2 *3 Displays the action details.
7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.11 Working Log

6.11.2 Job Execute Log
6 - 103
 *1 In the case of Communication action

1)

2)
6)

3)
4)
5)

7)

Display Description
Type, Database, Table Displays data of [Action type], [Database], and [Table name], which
1)
name were set in [Communication action].
Displays the number of records specified for [Specify the maximum
number of acquiring records] in the Multi select setting screen for the
2) Request record No. communication action.
When the number of records is not specified, [No specification] is
displayed.
Displays the execution result of the SQL text.
• When succeeded
3) Execution result [Success] is displayed.
• When failed
[Failed] is displayed.
• When [Select] or [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type]
The number of records that meet the Select/Update conditions is
displayed.
• When [Update] is selected for [Action type]
The number of updated records is displayed.
• When [Insert] is selected for [Action type] ([Insert records No.] is
Applicable record No. displayed.)
4)
(Insert records No.) The number of inserted records is displayed.
When the database is Wonderware Historian, the number of
inserted records is displayed as 0 with the following operations and
settings.
• Test mode • One-shot execution
• Settings without writing to the database
Displays the number of acquired records when [Select] or [MultiSelect]
5) Acquired record No.
is selected for [Action type].
Displays data of [DB-tag link settings], which were set in
6) DB-tag link settings
[Communication action].
7) SQL text The SQL text executed in [Communication action] is displayed.

6 - 104 6.11 Working Log

6.11.2 Job Execute Log
 1
*2 In the case of Operation action

OVERVIEW
1)
2)

2
Display Description

CONFIGURATION
1) Upper row Displays the settings of [Operation action].
2) Lower row Displays values calculated in [Operation action].

SYSTEM
*3 In the case of Transmit resource action

SPECIFICATIONS
1)
3)

4)

2)
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5)

6)

Display Description
5
Type, Database, Table Displays data of [Action type], [Database], and [Table name], which
1)
name were set in [Communication action].

MES INTERFACE
Displays the execution result of the SQL text.

FUNCTION
• When succeeded
2) Execution result [Success] is displayed.
• When failed
[Failed] is displayed. 6
Displays the data of [Resource type], [Logging ID/Alarm ID], and
Resource type, Logging ID/

FUNCTION SETTING
3) [Operation log file] (the stored location for the operation log file) set for
Alarm ID, Operation log file
[Transmit resource action]. MES INTERFACE
Displays the field name set on [Field name setting] in [Transmit
resource action] and the substitute value.
• When the resource data to be sent exists
4) Field name setting Displays the substitute value sent the first.
• When the resource data to be sent does not exist. (all or part of the
7
substitute value for the field)
DB CONNECTION

No data is inserted to [Value(1st rec.)].

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Displays the number of the SQL texts sent for [Transmit resource
action].
Displays 0 in the following cases.
5) No. of execute SQL • When sending no resource data (substitute values for all the fields)
• When a communication error occurs between the GOT and the 8
database
TROUBLESHOOTING

• When the SQL text cannot be sent to the database.

Displays the SQL text executed for [Transmit resource action].
6) SQL text Displays no data when sending no resource data (all or part of
substitute values for the field)

6.11 Working Log

6.11.2 Job Execute Log
6 - 105
 (3) Updating the Job Execute Log

1 Clicking the Update

Acquire button updates the Job Execute Log.

(4) Clearing the Job Execute Log

1 Clicking the Clear button clears the Job Execute Log.

6 - 106 6.11 Working Log

6.11.2 Job Execute Log
 1
6.12 Precautions

OVERVIEW
Precautions for the MES interface function setting are described below.

(1) When adding, editing or deleting a MES interface setting 2

Adding a new MES interface setting, or editing or deleting an existing one is
performed on the MES interface function setting screen.

CONFIGURATION
To newly add, edit or delete a MES interface setting, have the MES interface function

SYSTEM
setting screen displayed on GT Designer2.

(2) When deleting an item 3

Deleting an item such as [Device tag settings] is not allowed when the selected item is
used for another item such as [Job settings].

SPECIFICATIONS
As the error dialog box appears, identify the location, stop using it for another item,
and then delete the item.

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Up to ten locations of usage are displayed in the error dialog box.
If the item is used in 11 other items or more, the dialog box is displayed as shown
below.
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.12 Precautions 6 - 107

 (3) Type mismatch
(a) Value substitution
A value is assigned to a tag component after the type of the source is converted
into the type of the tag component.
A value is assigned to a variable after the type of the variable is converted into the
type of the substitution source.
(Example) Type conversion of tag components and variables
Because the operation result is out of the range for the integer type,
the variable Temp1 is the floating-point type.

A value is assigned after being converted to the type for the tag component.
For example, when the tag component, Data1, is double-precision type data,
the type of the variable, Temp1, is converted from floating-point to double-
precision first, and then the converted value is assigned.

If a type that cannot be converted is assigned to a tag component, the job

execution is canceled.
At this time, "Type conversion to tag component error" is displayed in the MES
interface Execute Log.

(b) Operation of numerical values

There are two kinds of numerical values: Integer type and Floating-point type.
• Integer type: Represents the bit type, single-precision type, and double-
precision type of tag components.
• Floating-point type: Represents the floating-point type of tag components.
The following table lists operation items and types of the results.
Item Operation result
Operation of floating-point type Floating-point type in all cases
Addition, subtraction, In the range from -2147483648 to 2147483647: Integer type
multiplication of Integer type Exceeding the above range: Floating-point type
Divisible: Integer type
Not divisible: Floating-point type
Division of Integer type When zero divide is executed, the job execution is canceled.
At this time, "Zero divide error" is displayed in the MES interface
Execute Log.

6 - 108 6.12 Precautions

 1
(c) Operation between character string type values
1) + operator

OVERVIEW
Combines character strings.
Example: "ABCDEFG" + "HIJ" "ABCDEFGHIJ"
2) Other operators 2
When both of the operands can be converted to numerical values, the
operation is performed using the numerical values.

CONFIGURATION
Both or either of them cannot be converted to numerical values, the job
execution is canceled.

SYSTEM
At this time, "Operation error" is displayed in the MES interface Execute Log.
Example:"312" "4" "1248"
3
"31AH" "4" Cancellation of job execution
3) Operation between a character string type value and a numerical type value

SPECIFICATIONS
Same as the case of the operation between character string type values

(4) Precautions resource data send action

(a) Checking resource data 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

The settings for collecting the resource data must be matched to the settings for

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

the resource data send action. When the settings are not matched, an error may

INTERFACE FUNCTION
occur at the job execution.
When setting for the resource data send action, click the Confirm setting button,
and then check that [No problem in the resource setting.] is displayed.
When the resource data send action setting differs from the setting for collecting 5
the resource data, the following error message are displayed.

MES INTERFACE
Resource type Error message Corrective action
Logging function setting

FUNCTION
Set [Logging Setting].
does not exist.
Logging
The logging ID is not Set the logging ID in [Logging ID/Alarm ID] that is set
available. for [Logging Setting].
Advanced user alarm
6
function setting does not Set [Advanced User Alarm Observation].

FUNCTION SETTING
Advanced user
exist.
MES INTERFACE
alarm
The alarm ID is not Set the alarm ID in [Logging ID/Alarm ID] that is set
available. for [Advanced User Alarm Observation].
Advanced system Advanced system alarm Check [Use System Alarm] for [Advanced System
alarm function is not available. Alarm].
Operation log function is not Check [Use Operation Log Settings] for [Operation 7
available. Log Setting].
Operation log
The operation log file name Click the Set operation log file name button to obtain
DB CONNECTION

is mismatch. the stored file for the operation log setting.

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.12 Precautions 6 - 109

 (b) Conditions for sending the sent resource data
When restarting the GOT, the GOT may send the sent data.
Multiple records are created in the database when the GOT sends the sent data.
The following shows conditions for sending the sent resource data.

Resource type Condition

Logging No sent resource data is sent.
• When restarting the GOT, the sent resource data is stored in the alarm
Advanced user alarm
log file.
• When restarting the GOT, the sent resource data is stored in the alarm
Advanced system alarm
log file.
• When restarting the GOT, the sent resource data is stored in the
Operation log
operation log file.

(c) Collecting no resource data when executing an action

1) When the data in the field set for [Field name setting] does not exist.
The GOT sends the data of "" (Null) to the field.
The following resource data shows the resource data types with no data
depending on conditions.

Resource type Insert data Action execution

Logging LoggingDevice Sending no data
Advanced user alarm Comments Sending ""(Null) data
Advanced system
None -
alarm
Object name(OPNAME), Operation
level(OPERATOR), Operation
level(OPE_ID), User ID(USER_ID), Action
Operation log No.(ACT_NO), Data type(DATA_TYPE), Sending no data
Device name(DEV_NAME), Change
value(CHG_VALUE), Previous
value(PREV_VALUE)

Point
Set "null-capable" in the fields for the database.
Without setting "null-capable", an error occurs at the job execution.
For the database setting, refer to the manual for the database to be used.

2) Collecting no resource data after the last action

The action is succeeded without communicating the GOT with the database.
(The MESInterface Execute Log is output.)
The access log is not output to the server computer.

6 - 110 6.12 Precautions

 1
CHAPTER 7 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING
TOOL

OVERVIEW
This chapter explains DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
2
7.1 DB Connection Service Functions

CONFIGURATION
Installing DB Connection Service on the server computer allows to use the MES interface

SYSTEM
function of the GOT.
The following shows the functions of the DB Connection Service.
3
Point

SPECIFICATIONS
(1) It is necessary to install DB Connection Service on all the database server
computers and application server computers to be accessed from the GOT.
(2) When using DB Connection Service on a database server computer, the
ODBC setting for the database used must be made beforehand.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

(3) When using DB Connection Service on an application server computer, an

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

account for user program execution must be created beforehand.

INTERFACE FUNCTION
(4) Changes to the DB Connection Service settings are made with DB
Connection Service Setting Tool.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.1 DB Connection Service Functions 7-1

 (1) ODBC connection function
The OBDC connection function connects the GOT and the ODBC interface for
database.
The following shows operation on the database server computer.

Database server
Database computer

ODBC

MES interface DB Connection

function Service

When When SQL

accessed execution failed

Access
log SQL
failure log

1 Receives SQL texts from the GOT.

2 Accesses the database via ODBC interface and executes the SQL text.

3 Sends the SQL text execution results to the GOT.

7-2 7.1 DB Connection Service Functions

 1
(2) Program execution function
The program execution function executes a program on an application server

OVERVIEW
computer upon request from the GOT.
The following shows operation on the application server computer.
2
Application server
Program computer

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3
MES interface DB Connection
function Service

SPECIFICATIONS
When
accessed

Access
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

log

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
1 Receives a program execution request from the GOT.

2 Executes programs on the application server computer.

5
3 Sends the program execution results to the GOT.

MES INTERFACE
(3) IP filter function ( Section 7.5 (3) Limit IP addresses which permit to

FUNCTION
connect)
The IP filter function allows specification of the IP address of the GOT that can
connect to the DB Connection Service, ensuring the security of the server computer. 6
Batch specification using the mask bit length specification is possible.

FUNCTION SETTING
If the IP filter function is not used, any GOT can connect to DB Connection Service.
MES INTERFACE

(4) Log output function

DB Connection Service outputs an access log and an SQL failure log.

(a) Access log ( Section 7.5 (4) Output access log) 7

The communication contents between the GOT and DB Connection Service are
output to the access log.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

For access log specifications, refer to the following.

Section 7.8.1 Access log

(b) SQL failure log ( Section 7.5 (5) Output SQL failed log)
If data cannot be updated/inserted normally due to an error such as no table at
8
SQL text execution, the error information is output to the SQL failure log.
TROUBLESHOOTING

For SQL failure log specifications, refer to the following.

Section 7.8.2 SQL failure log

7.1 DB Connection Service Functions 7-3

 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database

When using DB Connection Service on a database server computer, the ODBC setting for
the database used must be done beforehand.
For the ODBC setting, refer to the following.
Manuals and online help for the database software and operating system (OS) used

(1) When Oracle 8i, 9i or 10g is used

(This section gives a setting example of using Oracle 9i Standard Edition in
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System.)
Set the following conditions.
• Data source name *1 : SAMPLEDS
• TNS Service Name *2 : SAMPLETNS
• OracleHome: OraHome92
*1 Data source name can be set as desired.
For [Data source name] in [Server service settings], use the name set with this setting.
*2 The TNS service name is the name for accessing an Oracle database.
The name is entered when installing Oracle and creating a database instance.
This can be checked with [Configuration and Migration Tools] - [Net Manager] - [Service naming] of
Oracle .
(Start)

1 Clicking [Performance and Maintenance] in

Control Panel displays the [Performance and
Maintenance] dialog box.
To display Control Panel, select [Start] [Control
Panel].

(To the next page)

7-4 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database

 1
(From the previous page)

2 Double-clicking [Administrative Tools] displays the

OVERVIEW
[Administrative Tools] dialog box.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
3 Double-clicking [Data Sources (ODBC)] displays
the [ODBC Data Source Administrator] dialog box.
Select the [System DSN] tab, and click the Add 4
button.

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5
4 The [Create New Data Source] dialog box is

MES INTERFACE
displayed. Select [Oracle in OraHome92].

FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

5 In the displayed [Oracle ODBC Driver

Configuration] dialog box, set the following. 7
• [Data source name]: SAMPLEDS
• [TNS Service Name]: SAMPLETNS
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

(To the next page)

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.2 Setting ODBC of Database 7-5

 (From the previous page)

6 Clicking the Connection test button displays the

[Oracle ODBC Driver Connect] dialog box. Enter
the user name and password, then click the
OK button.

7 If the connection is normal, the confirmation dialog

box appears.

8 Click the OK button in the [Oracle ODBC

Driver Configuration] dialog box.

9 Click the OK button in the [ODBC Data Source

Administrator] dialog box.
(Completed)

7-6 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database

 1
(2) For Microsoft SQL Server 2000, Microsoft SQL Server 2005, MSDE 2000
and Wonderware Historian 9.0

OVERVIEW
(The following shows a setting example using Microsoft SQL Server 2000 with
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System.)
Set the following conditions. 2
• Data source name*1: SAMPLEDS

CONFIGURATION
• Server name*2: SAMPLESRV
*1 Data source name can be set as desired.

SYSTEM
For [Data source name] in [Server service settings], use the name set with this setting.
*2 The server name is the name for accessing a Microsoft SQL Server 2000 database.
This name is entered when installing Microsoft SQL Server 2000. 3
This can be checked with the SQL Server service manager server.

(Start)

SPECIFICATIONS
1 Clicking [Performance and Maintenance] on the
Control Panel displays the [Performance and
Maintenance] dialog box.
4
To display the Control Panel, select [Start]

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
[Control Panel].

INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
2 Clicking [Administrative Tools] displays

FUNCTION
[Administrative Tools] dialog box.

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

3 Double clicking [Data Sources (ODBC)] displays

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

[ODBC Data Source Administrator] dialog box.

Select the [System DSN] tab, then click the Add
button.
8
TROUBLESHOOTING

(To the next page)

7.2 Setting ODBC of Database 7-7

 (From the previous page)

4 The [Create New Data Source] dialog box is

displayed, then select [SQL Server].

5 The [Create a New Data Source to SQL Server]

dialog box is displayed, then set the following.
• [Data source name]: SAMPLEDS
• [Server name]: SAMPLESRV

6 Select the [With SQL Server authentication using

a login ID and password entered by the user.]
radio button, then enter [Login ID] and [Password].

REMARKS
Setting Wonderware Historian
Mark a check in [Change the default value to] and
select [Runtime].

(To the next page)

7-8 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database

 1
(From the previous page)

7 In the [ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup] dialog

OVERVIEW
box, click the [Test Data Source] button to check
that the connection is normal.
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
8 Click the OK button in the [SQL Server ODBC
Data Source Test] dialog box. 3
9 Click the OK button in the [ODBC Microsoft

SPECIFICATIONS
SQL Server Setup] dialog box.

10 Click the OK button in the [ODBC Data

Source Administrator] dialog box.
(End) 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.2 Setting ODBC of Database 7-9

 (3) For Microsoft Access 2000, Microsoft Access 2003, and Microsoft Access
2007
(The following shows a setting example using Microsoft Access 2003 with
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System.)
Set the following conditions.
• Data source name*1: SAMPLEDS
• Database name*2: C \ mes \ sampledb.mdb
*1 Data source name can be set as desired.
For [Data source name] in [Server service settings], use the name set with this setting.
*2 The database name is the name for accessing a Microsoft Access 2003 database.
Specify a database file path created with Microsoft Access 2003.

(Start)

1 Clicking [Performance and Maintenance] on the

Control Panel displays the [Performance and
Maintenance] dialog box.
To display the Control Panel, select [Start]
[Control Panel].

2 Clicking [Administrative Tools] displays

[Administrative Tools] dialog box.

3 Double clicking [Data Sources (ODBC)] displays

[ODBC Data Source Administrator] dialog box.
Select the [System DSN] tab, then click the Add
button.

(To the next page)

7 - 10 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database

 1
(From the previous page)

4 The [Create New Data Source] dialog box is

OVERVIEW
displayed, then select [Microsoft Access
Driver(*.mdb)].
5 When using Microsoft Access 2007 2
6 Select "Microsoft Access Driver(*.mdb. *accdb)".

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
7 The [ODBC Microsoft Access Setup] dialog box is 3
displayed. Set the following and click the
[Database] selection button.

SPECIFICATIONS
• [Data source name]: SAMPLEDS

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
8 The [Select Database] dialog box is displayed.

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Select the following and click the OK button.
• [Folder]: C \ mes
• [Database Name]: sampledb.mdb

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
9 Click the OK button in the [ODBC Microsoft
Access Setup] dialog box.

10 Click the OK button in the [ODBC Data 6

Source Administrator] dialog box.

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
(End)

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.2 Setting ODBC of Database 7 - 11

 7.3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool

For information on how to start DB Connection Service Setting Tool, refer to the following
manual.
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 2.4 Starting
the Software)

Point
Only one DB Connection Service Setting Tool can be activated.

7 - 12 7.3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool

 1
7.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

OVERVIEW
This section explains the screen structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool.

7.4.1 Screen structure

2

CONFIGURATION
Menu
Section 7.4.2 Menu configuration

SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

7.4.1 Screen structure
7 - 13
 7.4.2 Menu configuration

This section shows each command provided on the menu bar.

(1) File

Reference
Item Description
section
Import Imports an existing file.
Section 7.6
Export Exports the DB Connection Service Setting Tool to a file.
Exit Exits the DB Connection Service Setting Tool. -

(2) Help

Reference
Item Description
section
Product information Displays product information of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
Section 7.7
Connect to MELFANSweb Displays the [Connect to MELFANSweb] screen.

7 - 14 7.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

7.4.2 Menu configuration
 1
7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

OVERVIEW
The following shows how to change the DB Connection Service settings.

1 Set the following items and click the Reflect settings button.
2
2 After updating the settings, check for an error by selecting [Administrative Tools] -
[Event Viewer] in Windows .

CONFIGURATION
3 Section 8.1 (2) Error checking procedure

SYSTEM
Point
(1) Change the DB Connection Service settings while a job using the DB 3
Connection Service is not operating.
The status is as follows:

SPECIFICATIONS
• The GOT is powered OFF.
• The MES interface function operation is stopped by [MES interface
setting] - [Diagnosis] tab.
Section 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status
(Operation)
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

(2) If any changed settings are entered with a job using DB Connection Service

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
being operating, the execution of the connected job is canceled and a
communication error occurs.
Also, for a job to which [Enable DB buffering] is selected, SQLtexts are
buffered in the DB buffer.
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 7 - 15

 Item Description
Set the number of a port through which the DB Connection Service
Service port (required)
operates.
Set a DB access timeout time (Unit: seconds) for writing/reading a
DB access timeout database value from the GOT to the server computer, or for the case
where no response is returned after request for program execution.
Limit IP addresses which Specify whether or not to set IP addresses to which connection is to be
permit to connect permitted.
Output access log Set whether or not to output the access log.
Output SQL failed log Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log.

(1) Service port (required) (Range: 1024 to 65535, Default: 5112)

Set the number of a port through which the DB Connection Service operates.
The specified port number is used for communications with the GOT.
Set the same value in [Service port] as the one set in [Port No.] in [Server service
settings] under [MES interface setting].
Section 6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings

(2) DB access timeout (required) (Range: 1 to 3600; Default: 30)

Set a DB access timeout time (Unit: seconds) for writing/reading a database value
from the GOT to the server computer, or for the case where no response is returned
after request for program execution.
When a timeout occurs, the connection with the GOT is disconnected and job
execution is canceled.

Point
Set a value to [DB access timeout] so that the relation with a value set in
[Connection timeout] in [MES Interface Configuration Tool] is as follows:
• Connection timeout value DB access timeout value

7 - 16 7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

 1
(3) Limit IP addresses which permit to connect

OVERVIEW
(a) Specify whether or not to set IP addresses to which connection is to be permitted.
If the [limit IP addresses which permit to connect] box is checked, connection is
permitted from only the GOT with the specified IP address.
For IP addresses that are permitted to connect to DB Connection Service, at least 2
one IP address setting is required and up to 64 addresses can be set.
If the box is not checked, connection from any GOT will be permitted.

CONFIGURATION
(b) When [limit IP addresses which permit to connect] is selected, set IP address(es).

SYSTEM
1) Adding an IP address to permit its connection
<Specifying individual IP addresses>
3

1 Set the following items and click the Add button.

SPECIFICATIONS
Item Description
Set an IP address in decimal notation so that its connection will be
IP address
permitted.
Mask bit length (Blank)
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
2 The IP address is added to the [Permitted IP addresses list].

INTERFACE FUNCTION
(Example) 192.168.0.64

<Specifying IP addresses in a batch>

1 Set the following items and click the Add button.

5
Item Description
Set an IP address in decimal notation so that its connection will be
IP address

MES INTERFACE
permitted.
Set the effective bit length of the set IP address.

FUNCTION
Mask bit length
(Range: 1 to 32)

2 The IP address/mask bit length is added to the [Permitted IP addresses list].

6
(Example) 192.168.0.64/26

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 7 - 17

 (Example) Specifying IP addresses in a batch
If [192.168.0.64] is set for [IP address] and [26] for [Mask bit length], the IP
addresses set for connection permission are [192.168.0.64] to [192.168.0.127],
as the logical product is [192.168.0.64].

IP address permitted 192 168 0 ?

to connect 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ? ? ? ? ? ?

255 255 255 192

Mask bit length (26) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Logical product

192 168 0 64
IP address 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

The range in which the logical product above is met is between 192.168.0.64 to 127.
192 168 0 64
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

192 168 0 127

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2) Deleting an IP address with connection permission

1 Select the IP address to be deleted from [Permitted IP addresses list], then click
the Delete button.

(4) Output access log

(Default: Output)

(a) Set whether or not to output the access log.

(b) When [Output access log] is selected, set the following items.
Item Description
Output destination Set the output destination of the log file.
Access log capacity Set the capacity for one access log file and the number of files.

1) Output destination (Default: "dbConnector.log")

Set the output destination of the log file.
If no output destination is set, the log is output to the install folder.
If a read-only file is specified, the log is not output and an [Access log output
error] is output to [Event Viewer] of [Administrative Tools] in Windows .
2) Access log capacity (Range: 1 to 10MB 2 to 100 files, Default: 1MB 10
files)
Set the capacity for one access log file and number of files.
If the log exceeds the capacity for one file, the data are copied to a file of the
original name with a number attached and a new log file is created.
If the total number of files exceeds the set number of files, files are deleted in
order from the oldest one.

7 - 18 7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

 1
(Example) When [Output destination] is set as [dbConnector.log] and [Access
capacity] as [1MB 3 files]

OVERVIEW
Capacity over
Ne
w
2
1 dbConnector.log dbConnector.log
Re
na
me

CONFIGURATION
Files
within the
dbConnector.log.001 dbConnector.log.001 specified

SYSTEM
Re number of
na
me files

dbConnector.log.002 dbConnector.log.002 3
De
let
e

SPECIFICATIONS
1 When [dbConnector.log] exceeds 1M byte, it is renamed as
[dbConnector.log.001]. 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

A new [dbConnector.log] is created and logging resumes.

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
2 [dbConnector.log.001] is renamed as [dbConnector.log.002].

3 The total number of files exceeds 3 if [dbConnector.log.002] is renamed,

therefore [dbConnector.log.002] is deleted.
5
(5) Output SQL failed log
(Default: Output)

MES INTERFACE
(a) Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log.

FUNCTION
(b) When [Output SQL failed log] is selected, set the following items.
Item Description 6
Output destination Set the output destination of the log file.
SQL failure log capacity Set the capacity for one SQL failure log file and the number of files.

FUNCTION SETTING
1) Output destination (Default: "SQLFailed.log") MES INTERFACE

Set the output destination of the log file.

If no output destination is set, the log is output to the install folder.
If a read-only file is specified, the log is not output and an [SQL failure log
output error] is output to [Event Viewer] of [Administrative Tools] in Windows .
7
2) SQL failure log capacity (Range: 1 to 10MB 2 to 100 files, Default: 1MB
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

10 files)
SERVICE AND

Set the capacity for one SQL failure log file and the number of files.
If the log exceeds the capacity for one file, the data are copied to a file of the
original name with a number attached and a new log file is created.
If the total number of files exceeds the set number of files, files are deleted in 8
order from the oldest one.
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 7 - 19

 7.6 Importing/Exporting Files

Import/export files.

(1) Import
An existing file can be imported.

1 Select [File] [Import] from the menu.

2 The [Open] dialog box is displayed.

Set the following items, then click the Open button.

Item Description
Look in Select the location where the file is stored.
File name Specify the name of the file to be imported.
Select a type of the file to be imported.
Files of type
• DB connection service setting files

(2) Export
DB Connection Service Setting Tool can be exported to a file.

1 Select [File] [Export] from the menu.

2 The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.

Set the following items, then click the button.

Item Description
Save in Select the location where the file is to be saved.
File name Specify the name of the file to be saved.
Select a type of the file to be saved.
Files of type
• DB connection service setting files

7 - 20 7.6 Importing/Exporting Files

 1
7.7 Help

OVERVIEW
The product information of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool and the Connect to
MELFANSweb screen can be displayed.

2
(1) Product information

CONFIGURATION
1 Select [Help] [Product information] from the menu.

SYSTEM
2 The [Product information] dialog box of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool is
displayed.
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(2) Connect to MELFANSweb
6
1 Select [Help] [Connect to MELFANSweb] from the menu.

FUNCTION SETTING
2 The [Connect to MELFANSweb] dialog box is displayed.
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3 Clicking the OK displays the MELFANSweb page.

4 Online manuals and other information can be viewed on the website.

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.7 Help 7 - 21
 7.8 Output Log Specifications

The following shows the output log format for the access log and SQL failure log given in
Section 7.8.1 and later.

[Date] [Error code] message Line feed

Item Description
First line
1st to 4th bytes from the line
Year Four-digit integer for year (Numbers)
head
Year - Month delimiter 5th byte from the line head "/" (Slash: 2FH)
6th and 7th bytes from the
Month 2-digit integer (01 to 12) (Numbers)
line head
Month - Day delimiter 8th byte from the line head "/" (Slash: 2FH)
9th and 10th bytes from the
Day 2-digit integer (01 to 31) (Numbers)
line head
Day - Hour delimiter 11th byte from the line head " " (Space: 20H)
12th and 13th bytes from
Hour 2-digit integer (00 to 23) (Numbers)
[Date] the line head
Hour - Minute delimiter 14th byte from the line head ":" (Colon: 3AH)
15th and 16th bytes from
Minute 2-digit integer (00 to 59) (Numbers)
the line head
Minute - Second delimiter 17th byte from the line head ":" (Colon: 3AH)
18th and 19th bytes from
Second 2-digit integer (00 to 59) (Numbers)
the line head
Output Second - Millisecond
20th byte from the line head "." (Period: 2EH)
character delimiter
21st to 23rd bytes from the
Millisecond 3-digit integer (000 to 999) (Numbers)
line head
Millisecond - Error code delimiter 24th byte from the line head " " (Space: 20H)
25th to 34th bytes from the Alphanumeric character of "0x"+8-
[Error code]*1
line head digithexadecimal
Error code - Message delimiter 35th byte from the line head " " (Space: 20H)
36th and later bytes from
Message Compliant with the specifications of each log
the line head
Line feed End of line CR + LF (0DH, 0AH)
Second line (For database errors only)
Tab Line head TAB (09H)
2nd to 17th bytes from the
Database message header "Database Message "
line head
Database message header - Database
18th byte from the line head " " (Space: 20H)
message delimiter
19th and later bytes from
Database message Error messages that the database outputs
the line head
Line feed End of line CR + LF (0DH, 0AH)

*1 For error codes, refer to the following:

Section 8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method

7 - 22 7.8 Output Log Specifications

 1
7.8.1 Access log

The following explains the access log contents.

OVERVIEW
(1) Service start/end
(a) Start
2
Item Description

CONFIGURATION
Output log format [Date] [Error code] Service Start
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 Service Start

SYSTEM
(b) End
Item
Output log format [Date] [Error code] Service Stop
Description
3
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 Service Stop

SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Connection/disconnection from the GOT
(a) Connection
Item Description
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:MIFWS Connected:[Source IP]:[Target data source]:
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Output log format
[Connection ID]

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:MIFWS Connected:192.168.3.3:DataSource:ID

(b) Disconnection
Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:MIFWS Disconnected:[Source IP]:[Target data source]:[Connection ID]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:MIFWS Disconnected:192.168.3.3:DataSource:ID 5

(3) Connection/disconnection to a database

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(a) Connection
Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:DB Connect:[Target data source]: [Connection ID]:[Connection result*1]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:DB Connect:DataSource:ID:Success
6
*1 When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed

FUNCTION SETTING
(b) Disconnection MES INTERFACE

Item Description
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:DB Disconnect:[Target data source]: [Connection ID]:[Disconnection
Output log format
result*1]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:DB Disconnect:DataSource:ID:Success
7
*1 When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.8 Output Log Specifications

7.8.1 Access log
7 - 23
 (4) SQL text reception/processing results
(a) SELECT
Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:SQL<[SQL text]>:[Processing result*2]([No. of selected records])
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:SQL<SELECT COL from TABLE;>:Success(1)

*2 When succeeded: Success ([No. of selected records]), when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database
message

(b) UPDATE
Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:SQL<[SQL text]>:[Processing result*3]([No. of updated records])
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:SQL<UPDATE TABLE SET COL = '';>:Success(1)

*3 When succeeded: Success ([No. of updated records]), when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database
message

(c) INSERT
Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:SQL<[SQL text]>:[Processing result*4]([No. of inserted records])
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:SQL<INSERT INTO TABLE ( COL ) VALUES ('')
Example
;>:Success(1)

*4 When succeeded: Success ([No. of inserted records]), when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database
message

(d) COMMIT
Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:COMMIT:[Processing result*5]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:COMMIT:Success

*5 When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database message

(e) ROLLBACK
Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:ROLLBACK:[Processing result*6]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:ROLLBACK:Success

*6 When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database message

(f) GetNext (Request for next record)

Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:GetNext:[Processing result*1]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:GetNext:Success

*1 When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database message

(5) Program execution reception/processing results

Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID ProgramExec:[Source IP]:<[Command line]>[Processing result*2]([Return value])
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 ProgramExec:192.168.3.3:<hoge.exe>:Success(0)

*2 When succeeded: Success ([Return value]), when failed: Failed only

7 - 24 7.8 Output Log Specifications

7.8.1 Access log
 1
7.8.2 SQL failure log

The following shows the SQL failure log contents.

OVERVIEW
Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] [Target data source]:[SQL text]

Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 DataSource:INSERT INTO TABLE ( COL ) VALUES ('') ; 2
Database Message 0x00000388 [Oracle][ODBC][Ora]ORA-00904: "NUM" :invalid identifier

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

7.8 Output Log Specifications

7.8.2 SQL failure log
7 - 25
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING

8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method

This section describes how to check an error output when using the MES interface
function.

(1) Error checking and restoration

The following lists the points to be checked when an error occurred, and
corresponding recovery methods.

Error type Check point Recovery method

• When a value out of the permitted range has
• Check a warning dialog displayed when a setting
been entered in the MES interface function
MES interface setting error out of the permitted range was made in the MES
setting, disable the entry and return to the
interface function setting.
previous status.
• Check the GOT for a system alarm. • If any problem is found in the setting, reconfigure
• Check the MES interface Execute Log. the MES interface setting and restart the GOT.
MES interface function
• Check the status information. • For an error of the GOT or a controller, restore it
execution error
• Check the value of the tag component used for to normal condition according to its
notification. specifications.
• When a value out of the permitted range has
• Check a warning dialog displayed when a setting
DB Connection Service been entered in DB Connection Service Setting
out of the permitted range was made in DB
setting error Tool, disable the entry and return to the previous
Connection Service Setting Tool.
status.
• If any problem is found in the setting, reconfigure
• Check Event Viewer of Windows . the settings in DB Connection Service Setting
DB Connection Service
• Check the access log file. Tool and restart DB Connection Service.
execution error
• Check the SQL log file. • If the server computer has a problem, resolve it
and restart DB Connection Service.

Point
If more than one error are displayed in the error log of [MESI/F Log] or by error
dialog boxes, take corrective actions in chronological order.

8-1 8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method

 1
(2) Error checking procedure
For error codes, refer to the following:

OVERVIEW
Section 8.2 Error Code List

Item Checking procedure

MES interface function
2
Shows how to check an error occurred in execution of the MES interface function.
execution error
System alarm checking • For the system alarm checking procedure, refer to the following manual.

CONFIGURATION
procedure GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
• Connect the operating GOT to a configuration computer.

SYSTEM
Working log checking
• Display the Working log sheet in the MES interface setting.
procedure *1
• Display the detailed log from the Working log sheet and check the data.
Status checking • Connect the operating GOT to a configuration computer. 3
procedure • Display the Diagnosis sheet in the MES interface setting and check the data.
• Set a notification tag in the MES interface setting.

SPECIFICATIONS
• Add a setting for monitoring the tag value on the GOT screen.
• On the GOT screen, check if an error or exception has occurred in the tag or not.
• Notification tags can be set for the following four items:
• [Job settings] - [Communication action] - [Exception process setting] - [Exception processing:
Notification tag
component value
No applicable record]
• [Job settings] - [Communication action] - [Exception process setting] - [Exception processing:
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

checking procedure
Multiple applicable records]

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
• [Job settings] - [Communication action] - [Exception process setting] - [Exception processing:
Applicable records overflow]
• [Job settings] - [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution]
• [Server service settings] - [Access error notification setting]
DB Connection Service
execution error
Shows how to check an error occurred in execution of DB Connection Service.
5
• From the Windows start menu, select [Control Panel] - [Performance and Maintenance] -
Windows Event
[Administrative Tools] - [Event Viewer]. (Windows XP)

MES INTERFACE
Viewer checking
• Select the Application log to display the list.
procedure

FUNCTION
• Click on [Source] (sorting the list by the source name), and check for "DB Connector."
Access log checking • In DB Connection Service Setting Tool, select [Output access log].
procedure • Display the output file with Windows Notepad.
SQL log checking • In DB Connection Service Setting Tool, select [[Output SQL failed log]. 6
procedure • Display the output file with Windows Notepad.

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
*1 A CF card is required.

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method 8-2

 8.1.1 MES Interface Function setting

This section explains troubleshooting information on the setting of the MES interface
function.

(1) Common to all settings

Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• Check that no other GT Designer2 is
running and communicating on the same
Is the GOT communicating with another GT personal computer.
Designer2? • Check that GT Designer2 is not running
and communicating on other personal
computers.
Is there any disconnection in the
• Connect the cables properly.
connection route?
Is there any problem on the personal
• Replace it with another computer.
GT Designer2 cannot communicate with computer?
GOT. Is the port number correct?
• Check the port number setting.
(In RS-232 or Ethernet connection)
• Issue the ping command from the
Is the GOT connected to the network?
personal computer to the GOT to confirm
(When using Ethernet connection)
the network connection.
Is the IP address setting correct?
• Correct the IP address setting.
(When using Ethernet connection)
Is there a firewall and/or a proxy server in
• Ask your network administrator about the
the connection route?
firewall and proxy server settings.
(In Ethernet connection)
All the text is not displayed in a table. • Adjust the column width of the table.
Isn't the column width narrow?
(The text display is truncated.) Section 6.3.1 Screen structure

(2) [Device tag settings] ( Section 6.5 Device Tag Settings)

Symptom Checked item Corrective action
Is the selected item used in [Job settings]?
• As the error dialog box appears, identify
Is the selected item used in [DB buffering
the location, stop using it for another
Unable to change or delete an item in setting] of [Option setting]?
item, and then delete the item.
[Device tag settings]. Is the selected item used in [Access error
• An item used for another item is unable
notification setting] of [Server service
to be deleted.
settings]?
• Because a unique name must be used
Is the same name used for [Server service
Unable to set or change [Device tag name]. for [Server service name] and [Device tag
name] or another [Device tag name]?
name], use a different name.

8-3 8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method

8.1.1 MES Interface Function setting
 1
(3) [Job settings] ( Section 6.7 Job Settings)
Symptom Checked item Corrective action

OVERVIEW
• Do not use Select actions in the job
where DB buffering is enabled.
Unable to set [DB buffering setting]. Is there any Select action set for the job?
• The DB buffering is not available for jobs
performing Select actions.
2
• Delete any unnecessary variable settings
Are there 64 variables that were already
Unable to set a new variable. of the job.

CONFIGURATION
defined in the job?
• Up to 64 variables can be set for one job.
• Select any other than [Handshake

SYSTEM
Unable to select [Trigger 2] in [Trigger Is [Handshake operation] selected for operation] for [Trigger 1].
conditions]. [Trigger 1]? • When [Handshake operation] is selected,
selection is not allowed for [Trigger 2]. 3
Is the DB buffering enabled? • Disable the DB buffering.
Unable to set [Exception processing
• Set any other than [Insert] for [Action
setting] in [Communication action]. Is [Insert] set for [Action type]?

SPECIFICATIONS
type].

(4) [Diagnosis] tab ( Section 6.10 Diagnosis)

4
Symptom Checked item Corrective action

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
GT Designer2 cannot communicate with Has Option OS (MES Interface) been • Install Option OS (MES Interface) on the

INTERFACE FUNCTION
GOT. installed? GOT.

(5) [Working log] tab ( Section 6.11 Working Log)

Symptom Checked item Corrective action
5
GT Designer2 cannot communicate with Has Option OS (MES Interface) been • Install Option OS (MES Interface) on the
GOT. installed? GOT.

MES INTERFACE
• Install a CF card.
Is there a CF card inserted?

FUNCTION
• Turn ON the CF card access switch.
No log is displayed.
• On the Diagnosis tab, check the MES
Is the MES interface function operating?
interface function status.
• Check if Adjust is enabled with the Utility 6
No execution result is displayed in spite of Is the time adjust function of the GOT function of the GOT.

FUNCTION SETTING
SNTP time synchronization setting. disabled? • Check if Adjust is enabled in GT
MES INTERFACE
Designer2.

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method

8.1.1 MES Interface Function setting
8-4
 8.1.2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool

This section explains troubleshooting information on the setting of DB Connection Service

Setting Tool.
Chapter 7 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• Terminate the already started DB
Unable to start DB Connection Service Has DB Connection Service Setting Tool Connection Service Setting Tool.
Setting Tool. been already started? • Only one DB Connection Service Setting
Tool can be activated.
Was a user ID having the administrator • Log in again with a user ID having the
Unable to reflect the setting.
authority used for the login? administrator authority.
• Uncheck the [limit IP addresses which
permit to connect] checkbox, or add an
Unable to save the setting. Is there no permitted IP address?
IP address for which connection is
permitted.
Is the file set in [Output destination] read-
• Correct the file specification.
only?
[Access log output error] is recorded in
Is the access to the folder containing the
[Event Viewer] of [Administrative Tools] in • Check the right of access to the folder.
file set in [Output destination] authorized?
Windows .
Is the drive space of the server computer
• Check the free space on the drive.
full?
Is the file set in [Output destination] read-
• Correct the file specification.
only?
[SQL failure log output error] is recorded in
Is the access to the folder containing the
[Event Viewer] of [Administrative Tools] in • Check the right of access to the folder.
file set in [Output destination] authorized?
Windows .
Is the drive space of the server computer
• Check the free space on the drive.
full?

8-5 8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method

8.1.2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool
 1
8.2 Error Code List

OVERVIEW
The error code list is shown below.
For the error output checking method, refer to the following.
Section 8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
2
8.2.1 Error log in the Working log

CONFIGURATION
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action

SYSTEM
• The device value cannot be collected.
0x41130001 Tag value collecting error Check the device settings and the network
configuration.
3
• The set data are erroneous.
0x41140029
Download them again.
Setting read error

SPECIFICATIONS
• In the case of one-shot job execution, the CF
0x4114002A
card may corrupted. Replace the CF card.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
• An Ethernet communication error has occurred.

0x4114002B DB connection service communication error

• Check if [Server service settings] are correct.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
• The data cannot be converted to the specified
type.
0x4114005F Type conversion error
• Change the setting so that type conversion will
be available in any case.
• Failed to write data to the tag. 5
0x41140061 Tag write error • Check if data can written to the device specified
for the tag component.

MES INTERFACE
• Check if [Device tag settings] are correct.
0x41140065 Failed to perform the tag access.

FUNCTION
Section 6.5 Device Tag Settings
• Failed to read data from the tag.
0x41140069 Tag value read error • Check if [Device tag settings] are correct.
Section 6.5 Device Tag Settings 6
• The data could not be converted to the type

FUNCTION SETTING
specified for the tag component.
0x41140077 Type conversion to tag component error
MES INTERFACE
• Change the setting so that type conversion will
be available in any case.
0x41140081 • Data stored in the DB buffer are invalid.
DB buffer content error • The CF card may be corrupted.
0x41140083
• Replace the CF card.
• A part of invalid data in the DB buffer has been
7
corrected.
0x41140084 Partial correction of DB buffer content
• A part of the DB buffered data in the CF card
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

may have been corrupted.

• Failed to clear the DB buffer.
0x41140086 DB buffer clear error • The CF card may be corrupted.
• Replace the CF card.
8
(To the next page)
TROUBLESHOOTING

8.2 Error Code List

8.2.1 Error log in the Working log
8-6
 (From the previous page)
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
• The DB buffer file is invalid.
0x41140087 DB buffer file error • The CF card may be corrupted.
• Replace the CF card.
• Data stored in the DB buffer are invalid.
0x41140089 DB buffer content error • The CF card may be corrupted.
• Replace the CF card.
• Because the DB buffer became full, the data
0x41140093 DB buffer full error could not be stored in the DB buffer.
• Ensure the CF card capacity.
• Failed in file operation during DB buffering
0x41140099 DB buffering error operation.
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
• Data in the DB buffer could not be read normally.
0x4114009F DB buffer read error
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
• Failed to clear the DB buffer.
0x411400A1 DB buffer clear error
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
• Data in the DB buffer could not be read normally.
0x411400A3 DB buffer read error
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
• The DB buffer is empty.
0x411400A5 DB buffer empty error
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
• Data stored in the DB buffer are invalid.
0x411400A6 DB buffer content error
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
0x411400B2 • Character strings could not be converted to
0x411400B6 numerical values.
Character string number conversion error
0x411400BA • Change the setting so that type conversion will
0x411400C0 be available in any case.
• Division by zero was attempted.
0x411400D0 Overflow or zero divide error
• Change the setting to avoid division by zero.
• Invalid operation was performed.
0x411400D2 Operation error • Change the setting so that any invalid operation
will not performed.
• Check that the option OS for the logging function
0x411400D4 Logging function is not running. for installed on the GOT.
• Check that the logging setting is configured.
• The logging ID is invalid.
0x411400D6 Invalid logging ID.
• Set the logging ID for the logging setting.
• The advanced system alarm setting is invalid.
0x411400DC Advanced system alarm function is not available. • Set the advanced system alarm observation
setting.
• The alarm ID is invalid.
0x411400E2 Invalid alarm ID. • Set the alarm ID for the advanced user alarm
observation setting.

(To the next page)

8-7 8.2 Error Code List

8.2.1 Error log in the Working log
 1
(From the previous page)
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
• The maximum number of obtained records is

OVERVIEW
invalid.
0x411400E8 Invalid max number of select record.
• Set the tag component value specified as the
maximum number of records 1 or more.
• Check that the option OS for the operation log 2
function is installed on the GOT.
0x411400EA Operation log function is not running
• Check that the operation log setting is

CONFIGURATION
configured.
0x411400EE Unable to find the operation log file. • The MES interface function in the GOT cannot

SYSTEM
0x411400F0 Unable to open the operation log file. access the operation log file.
• Check that the CF card including the operation
0x411400F2 Unable to acquire the operation log file.
log file is installed in the GOT.
• An error occurred in the Ethernet
3
communication, and the communication failed to
start.

SPECIFICATIONS
• Check the Ethernet connection.
0x41150110 Communication start error
• Check if [Server service settings] are correct.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

0x41150120 Communication connection error • An Ethernet communication error has occurred.

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

• Check the Ethernet connection.

INTERFACE FUNCTION
0x41150121 Communication connection timeout • Check if [Server service settings] are correct.

0x41150130 Message transmission error Section 6.6 Server Service Settings

• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
0x41150131 Message transmission timeout Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
• An Ethernet communication error has occurred. 5
• Check the Ethernet connection.
0x41150140 Message reception error • Check if [Server Service setting] are correct.

MES INTERFACE
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings

FUNCTION
• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
0x41150141 Message reception timeout • Check the error information of DB Connection
Service (access log file). 6
Section 7.8.1 Access log

FUNCTION SETTING
0x41150160 DB transaction status error
MES INTERFACE
0x41150161 DB transaction start status error • Check the transaction status of the database.

0x41150162 DB transaction end status error

• The connection to unsupported DB Connection
0x41150300 Unsupported DB Connection Service error Service is failed. 7
Check the version of DB Connection Service.
• The connection to DB Connection Service with
DB CONNECTION

0x41150301 Unsupported communication timeout setting unsupported communication timeout is failed.

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

• Check the version of DB Connection Service.

• An Ethernet communication error has occurred.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
• Check if [Server service settings] are correct.
0x41151010 Database connection error
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
8
• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
TROUBLESHOOTING

Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database

(To the next page)

8.2 Error Code List

8.2.1 Error log in the Working log
8-8
 (From the previous page)
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
• An Ethernet communication error has occurred.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
0x41151110 Message reception error • Check if [Server Service setting] are correct.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
0x41151120 Received message data error • Check the error information of DB Connection
Service (access log file).
Section 7.8.1 Access log
• No response is received from DB Connection
Waiting for DB access (program execution)
0x41151180 Service.
completion timeout
Check the server and the network.
0x41151320 SELECT execution error

0x41151330 COMMIT execution error

• Check the sent SQL text and database contents.
0x41151340 ROLLBACK execution error
• Check if the table and field settings are correct.
0x41151350 DB update error
Section 6.8 Job Settings - Actions
0x41151410 SQL execution error

0x41151420 ODBC connection error during SQL execution

0x41152005 • Check if the program specified with the program

Execution error (Program execution function) execution function is executable with the
0x41152006 specified account.
• There is no execution file of the program that is
specified for the program execution function.
Specified program file not exist (Program execution
0x41152007 • Check if the program specified with the program
function)
execution function is executable with the
specified account.
• There are more than one execution file of the
program that is specified for the program
Specified program file duplicated (Program execution function.
0x41152008
execution function) • Check if the program specified with the program
execution function is executable with the
specified account.
0x41152009 • Check if the program specified with the program
to Execution error (Program execution function) execution function is executable with the
0x41152014 specified account.

8-9 8.2 Error Code List

8.2.1 Error log in the Working log
 1
8.2.2 DB Connection Service

The DB Connection Service outputs errors to the Windows Event Log, access log, and

OVERVIEW
SQL failure log.
For Windows Vista , DB Connection Service Client also outputs errors to Windows
Event Log. 2
(1) Event log of Windows

CONFIGURATION
(a) Event log output warning list of DB Connection Service (Source name:

SYSTEM
DBConnector)

Warning event ID Error description and cause Corrective action

• Configure the settings again with DB Connection
3
There is no setting file. Service Setting Tool.
1

SPECIFICATIONS
Start the service using the default setting. Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool

(b) Event log output warning list of DB Connection Service (Source name:
DBConnector) 4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

Error event ID Error description and cause Corrective action

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Unable to start the service due to insufficient
1
memory.
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
Unable to start the service due to insufficient
2
resources.
• Refer to the actions of error codes 101 to 129.
5
Failed to read the setting file.
The service is stopped.
• Actions are displayed with error codes 101 to 5
129.
• Refer to the actions of error codes 401 to 403,

MES INTERFACE
Failed to initialize the log file. and 501 to 503.
6

FUNCTION
The service is stopped. • Actions are displayed with error codes 401 to
403, and 501 to 503.
• Change the server port No. with DB Connection

9
The server port has already been opened. Service Setting Tool.
6
The service is stopped. Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE
The computer ran out of memory while reading the • Terminate any unnecessary applications.
101
setting file. • Add more memory to the personal computer.
• Reinstall the DB Connection Service to the
102 The setting file path is too long.
directory whose path name is shorter.
103 The setting file name indicates the directory.
104 The setting file could not be opened.
• Reinstall the DB Connection Service. 7
• Terminate other applications, and make the
setting again with DB Connection Service Setting
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

105 Description of the setting file is not correct. Tool.

Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool
(To the next page)
8
TROUBLESHOOTING

8.2 Error Code List

8.2.2 DB Connection Service
8 - 10
 (From the previous page)
Error event ID Error description and cause Corrective action
108 The server port No. setting is not correct.
109 The server port No. setting is out of range.
110 The timeout time setting is not correct.
111 The timeout time setting is out of range.
There are too many connection-permitted IP
112
address settings.
Description of the connection-permitted IP address
113
setting is not correct.
The mask bit length setting of the connection-
114
permitted IP address is not correct.
The mask bit length setting of the connection-
115
permitted IP address is out of range.
116 The access log setting is not correct.
The setting of the access log file name is not
117
correct.
118 The access log file name is too long.
The maximum file size setting for the access log is • Configure the settings again with DB Connection
119
not correct. Service Setting Tool.
The maximum file size setting for the access log is Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
120
out of range. Connection Service Setting Tool
The maximum number of access log files is not set
121
correctly.
The maximum number of access log files is out of
122
range.
123 The SQL failure log setting is not correct.
The setting of the SQL failure log file name is not
124
correct.
125 The SQL failure log file name is too long.
The maximum file size setting for the SQL failure
126
log is not correct.
The maximum file size setting for the SQL failure
127
log is out of range.
The maximum number of SQL failure log files is not
128
set correctly.
The maximum number of SQL failure log files is out
129
of range.
The computer ran out of memory when initializing
401
the access log file. • Terminate any unnecessary applications.
The computer ran out of resources when initializing • Add more memory to the personal computer.
402
the access log file.
• Shorten the path to the access log file with DB
Connection Service Setting Tool.
403 The full path name of the access log file is too long.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool

(To the next page)

8 - 11 8.2 Error Code List

8.2.2 DB Connection Service
 1
(From the previous page)
Error event ID Error description and cause Corrective action
• If no directory exists for storing the access log

OVERVIEW
file, create it.
• When the attribute of the access log file is set to
read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the access log file, 2
404 The access log file could not be opened. enable it in the security setting.
• When the access log file name represents a

CONFIGURATION
directory, rename or delete the directory.
• When the access log file has been open in

SYSTEM
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the disk space is full, ensure a free disk
space.
3
405 The log could not be written to the access log file. • When the access log file has been open in
another application, terminate the application.

SPECIFICATIONS
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attribute of the oldest access log file is
set to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the oldest access log
406 Failed to delete an old access log file. file, enable it in the security setting. 4
• When the oldest access log file has been open in

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
another application, terminate the application.

INTERFACE FUNCTION
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attributes of the new and old access
log files are set to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the new and old

407 Failed to rename the access log file.

access log files, enable it in the security setting.
• When the new and old access log files have
5
been open in another application, terminate the
application.

MES INTERFACE
• Check the disk device for any fault.

FUNCTION
The computer ran out of memory when initializing
501
the SQL failure log file. • Terminate any unnecessary applications.
The computer ran out of resources when initializing • Add more memory to the personal computer.
502
the SQL failure log file. 6
• Shorten the path to the SQL failure log file with

FUNCTION SETTING
The full path name of the SQL failure log file is too DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
503
MES INTERFACE
long. Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool
• If no directory exists for storing the SQL failure
log file, create it.
• When the attribute of the SQL failure log file is
set to read-only, cancel the setting.
7
• If read/write is disabled for the SQL failure log
DB CONNECTION

504 The SQL failure log file could not be opened. file, enable it in the security setting.
SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

• When the SQL failure log file name represents a

directory, rename or delete the directory.
• When the SQL failure log file has been open in
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault. 8
(To the next page)
TROUBLESHOOTING

8.2 Error Code List

8.2.2 DB Connection Service
8 - 12
 (From the previous page)
Error event ID Error description and cause Corrective action
• When the disk space is full, ensure a free disk
space.
The log could not be written to the SQL failure log
505 • When the SQL failure log file has been open in
file.
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attribute of the oldest SQL failure log
file is set to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the oldest SQL failure
log file, enable it in the security setting.
506 Failed to delete an old SQL failure log file.
• When the oldest SQL failure log file has been
open in another application, terminate the
application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attributes of the new and old SQL
failure log files are set to read-only, cancel the
setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the new and old SQL
507 Failed to rename the SQL failure log file. failure log files, enable it in the security setting.
• When the new and old SQL failure log files have
been open in another application, terminate the
application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.

(c) Event log output error list of DB Connection Service Client (source name:
DBCnctClient)

Error code Error description and cause Corrective action

50
51 • Terminate unnecessary applications.
Unable to start DB Connection Service Client.
52 • Add more memory to the computer.
53

8 - 13 8.2 Error Code List

8.2.2 DB Connection Service
 1
(2) Access log of DB Connection Service
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action

OVERVIEW
(Service Not Start.)
0x20100001 Failed to start the service due to insufficient
memory. • Terminate any unnecessary applications.
(Service Not Start.) • Add more memory to the personal computer. 2
0x20100002 Failed to start the service due to insufficient
resources.

CONFIGURATION
(Service Not Start.)
• If a firewall software has been installed, make the
0x20100011 Failed to start the service due to failure of the

SYSTEM
specified server port operational.
server port initialization.
• Terminate the application that has opened the
server port. 3
(Service Not Start.) • Set another server port No. with DB Connection
0x20100012
Another application has opened the server port. Service Setting Tool.

SPECIFICATIONS
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool
(Not Initialize a service for each client: [IP address])
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
0x20200001 Failed to initialize a service for each client due to
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
insufficient memory.
• Using DB Connection Service Setting Tool, add
4

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

(Deny network connection request from [IP
the IP address to those with connection

BEFORE USE OF THE MES

address])

INTERFACE FUNCTION
0x20200002 permission.
Rejected the connection request from the non-
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
permitted IP address.
Connection Service Setting Tool
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
0x20300001 address])
Failed to receive data due to insufficient memory.
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
5
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300010 address])

MES INTERFACE
Connection disconnected during request reception.

FUNCTION
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300011 address])
• Check if it is connected to the network.
Timed out during request reception.
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
address])
• Check if the power of the GOT has not been 6
0x20300012 turned off.
Detected failure of the MES interface module while

FUNCTION SETTING
waiting for or receiving a request.
MES INTERFACE
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300013 address])
Receive I/O error
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300014 address]) 7
• Check the source IP address setting.
Buffer overrun (Request length exceeded)
• Confirm the version of the Option OS (MES
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
DB CONNECTION

Interface).
SETTING TOOL

0x20300015 address])
SERVICE AND

Received an invalid request.

(To the next page)

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

8.2 Error Code List

8.2.2 DB Connection Service
8 - 14
 (From the previous page)
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
0x20310010 address])
Failed to transmit a response due to disconnection.
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
0x20310011 address])
• Check if it is connected to the network.
Timed out during response transmission.
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
• Check if the power of the GOT has not been
address])
0x20310012 turned off.
Detected failure of the MES interface module
during response transmission.
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
0x20310013 address])
Send I/O error
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
0x20400001 [User]: Failed)
Failed in DB connection due to insufficient memory.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
[User]: Failed)
0x20400002
Failed in DB connection due to insufficient
resources.
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]: • Check the source IP address setting.
0x20400010 [User]: Failed) • Confirm the version of the option OS (MES
Invalid DB connection request Interface).
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
0x20400020 [User]: Failed)
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
Failed to create a DB handle.
• Set correct data source name, user name, and
password in [Server service settings] of [MES
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]: interface setting].
0x20400022 [User]: Failed) Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
Failed in DB connection. • Check if the personal computer is restarted after
the database is installed. Restart the personal
computer if not restarted.
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600001
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient memory.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600002 (SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient
resources.

(To the next page)

8 - 15 8.2 Error Code List

8.2.2 DB Connection Service
 1
(From the previous page)
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)

OVERVIEW
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600010
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed) 2
Invalid SQL execution request • Check the source IP address setting.
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed) • Confirm the version of the option OS (MES

CONFIGURATION
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed) Interface).
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)

SYSTEM
0x20600020 (SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
DB Connection Service does not support the SQL
instruction to be executed.
3
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)

SPECIFICATIONS
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600021
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed) • Correctly set a database type for [DB server
Failed in preparation before SQL execution. setting], a table name in the job for the
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed) communication action setting, or the resource 4
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed) data send action setting in [MES Interface].

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed) Section 6.6 Server Service Settings

INTERFACE FUNCTION
0x20600022 (SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Failed to obtain the number of fields in the record
that is to be obtained by the SQL execution.

(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)

• Correctly set a database type for [DB server
setting], a table name, field names, Select/
5
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
Update conditions, and types of the data to be
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600023 stored in the fields in the job for the

MES INTERFACE
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
communication action setting or the resource
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)

FUNCTION
data send action setting in [MES Interface].
Failed in SQL execution.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed) • In [MES interface setting], set update conditions
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed) correctly for the Communication action setting of 6
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed) the Job settings.

FUNCTION SETTING
0x20600025 (SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed) Section 6.8.1 Setting items in
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed) Communication action MES INTERFACE
No record was updated or inserted by the SQL • Check if the database has been filled with
execution. registered data.
• Check if it is connected to the network.
(SID [Session ID]: *** Transmitting Commit
0x2060002B Success Response Failed. ***)
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
• Check if the power of the GOT has not been
7
Failed to transmit the COMMIT success response.
turned off.
DB CONNECTION

(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

0x20700001 Failed in remote execution due to insufficient

memory. • Terminate any unnecessary applications.
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed) • Add more memory to the personal computer.
0x20700002 Failed in remote execution due to insufficient
resources. 8
• Check the source IP address setting.
TROUBLESHOOTING

(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)

0x20700010 • Confirm the version of the option OS (MES
Invalid remote execution request
Interface).

(To the next page)

8.2 Error Code List

8.2.2 DB Connection Service
8 - 16
 (From the previous page)
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
• In [MES interface setting], set correct user name
and password for the application server setting.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the user account is invalid or not by
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed) Administrative Tools of Windows .
0x20700020
Failed to log on in remote execution. • Check if the setting is forcing the user to enter
password at next logon by Administrative Tools
of Windows .
• Check if the user password is expired or not by
Administrative Tools of Windows .
• No user profile for Windows has been created.
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed) • Confirm that the user ID set for the application
0x20700021
Failed to load user profile during remote execution. server setting of the MES interface setting can be
used to log on Windows , and reexecute.
• Check if the application to be executed in remote
execution exists or not.
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
• Check if the name of the application to be
0x20700023 Failed to generate process during remote
executed in remote execution is a directory.
execution.
• Make a proper security setting for the application
to be executed in remote execution.
• Set the longer time to the DB access timeout for
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
0x20700024 Timeout or aborted of waiting to complete remote
• Exit the application for the remote execution
execution.
before logging off.
(SID [Session ID]: TCPOpen Request Error: [IP • Check the source IP address setting.
0x20800010 address]) • Confirm the version of the option OS (MES
Invalid TCPOpen request Interface).

8 - 17 8.2 Error Code List

8.2.2 DB Connection Service
 1
(3) SQL failure log of DB Connection Service
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action

OVERVIEW
0x20600001 Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient memory.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient
0x20600002 • Add more memory to the personal computer.
resources.
• Check the source IP address setting.
2
DB Connection Service does not support the SQL
0x20600020 • Confirm the version of the option OS (MES
instruction to be executed.
Interface).

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
0x20600021 Failed in preparation before SQL execution. • Correctly set a database type for [DB server
setting], a table name in the job for the
communication action setting, or the resource
data send action setting in [MES Interface].
3
Failed to obtain the number of fields in the record
0x20600022 Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
that is to be obtained by the SQL execution.

SPECIFICATIONS
• Correctly set a database type for [DB server
setting], a table name, field names, Select/
Update conditions, and types of the data to be
0x20600023 Failed in SQL execution. stored in the fields in the job for the 4
communication action setting or the resource

SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES

BEFORE USE OF THE MES
data send action setting in [MES Interface].

INTERFACE FUNCTION
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• In [MES interface setting], set update conditions
correctly for the Communication action setting of
the Job settings.
No record was updated or inserted by the SQL
0x20600025
execution.
Section 6.8.1 Setting items in
Communication action
5
• Check if the database has been filled with
registered data.

MES INTERFACE
• Check if it is connected to the network.
(Data source name: *** Transmitting Commit

FUNCTION
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
0x2060002B Success Response Failed. ***)
• Check if the power of the GOT has not been
Failed to transmit the COMMIT success response.
turned off.
6

FUNCTION SETTING
MES INTERFACE

7
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8
TROUBLESHOOTING

8.2 Error Code List

8.2.2 DB Connection Service
8 - 18
APPENDICES

Appendix 1 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables by Setting

Items

Appendix 1.1 ASCII code table

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 (SP) 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 [ 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ‘ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

App - 1
 Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, vari-
able names, etc.

APPENDICES
(1) ASCII characters
The shaded characters can be used.
(However, neither a number nor an underscore ( _ ) can be used as the first
character.)
2 3 4 5 6 7
0 (SP) 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q

INDEX
2 [ 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 Åe 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

(2) Reserved terms

The following words are reserved terms and therefore cannot be used.
Reserved terms
A abstract
B boolean, break, byte
C case, catch, char, class, const, continue
D DATETIME, debugger, default, delete, do, double
E else, enum, event, exit, export, extends
F false, final, finally, float, for, function
G goto
I if, implements, import, in, include, Infinity, instanceof, in, interface, invoke
L long
N NaN, native, new, null
O oneshot
P package, private, protected, public
R return
S short, static, super, switch, synchronized, SYSTEM
T this, throw, throws, trace, transient, true, try, typeof
U undefined
V var, void, volatile
W while, with

App - 2
 Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants, etc.

The shaded characters can be used.

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 (SP) 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 [ 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ‘ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.

The shaded characters can be used.

(However, a number cannot be used as the first character.)
2 3 4 5 6 7
0 (SP) 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 [ 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ‘ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y I y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

App - 3
Appendix 2 About Monitoring Interval Timeout

APPENDICES
Depending on the number of set jobs or the trigger condition setting, the monitoring
interval timeout may be generated in the MES interface function.
This section explains monitoring interval timeout.

Point
Although up to 64 jobs can be registered and trigger conditions can be set to each
of them, some adjustment in trigger condition settings is required depending on
the number of the jobs.

INDEX
(1) Monitoring interval timeout
The monitoring interval timeout means that the trigger detection time (the time
provided for the trigger monitoring function to determine if the trigger conditions are
met) becomes longer than the time limit of trigger occurrence (monitoring interval).
When a monitoring interval timeout occurs, the job may not be executed even though
set trigger conditions are met.
Monitoring interval: 1s 10:08:30 10:08:31 10:08:32 10:08:33 10:08:34 10:08:35

Monitoring timeout
occurred

Detecting Detecting Detecting Detecting Detecting

trigger trigger trigger trigger trigger

Job Job Job Job

execution execution execution execution

(2) Causes of monitoring interval timeout

A monitoring interval timeout occurs when the total jobs cannot be processed in a
monitoring interval.
The monitoring interval includes the following sampling intervals.
• Sampling interval set for [Sampling setting] in [Device tag settings] when
selecting [Value monitoring startup] or [Handshake operation] for [Trigger
conditions] in [Job settings]
Section 6.5 Device Tag Settings
• Sampling interval set for [Trigger conditions] when selecting [Specified time
period startup] for [Trigger conditions] in [Job settings]
Section 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions

Remark
In the following cases, monitoring interval timeouts do not occur.
• When selecting [Time specification startup] or [GOT Initializing] for [Trigger con-
ditions] in [Job settings]
• When the total jobs are processed in a monitoring interval

App - 4
 (Example 1)
When the time for trigger detection is shorter than the monitoring interval
Since processing for trigger detection is performed within each monitoring
interval, no monitoring interval timeout occurs.
Monitoring
interval

Detecting trigger

(Example 2)
When the time for trigger detection is longer than the monitoring interval
Since processing for trigger detection cannot be completed within each monitoring
interval, monitoring interval timeout occurs.
The processing for trigger detection is performed at the next timing after the
monitoring interval.
Monitoring
interval

Detecting trigger
Monitoring interval
timeout occurred.

Point
If the monitoring interval timeout has occurred, set a monitoring interval longer
than the processing time described in This section (4) in each of all jobs.

(3) How to check the monitoring interval timeout

The monitoring interval timeout can be checked in the Monitoring interval timeout
count area (GS275).
For the Monitoring interval timeout count area, refer to the following.
Section 3.4.2 (3) Monitoring interval timeout count (GS275)

App - 5
(4) Processing time for trigger detection
Total number of trigger conditions 100 (ms) can be assumed as a processing time
for trigger detection.

APPENDICES
Total number of trigger conditions is the total of those set for individual jobs.
Note that [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2] are counted separately.
Also, [Handshake operation] must be counted as "2" for each.

(Example 3)
Processing time for trigger detection, which is required for [Job settings] shown
below
Since the number of trigger conditions is 12, the assumed processing time for

INDEX
trigger detection is: 12 100 = 1200 (ms)
Setting a value of 1200ms or longer to the monitoring interval in all jobs can
prevent occurrence of the monitoring interval timeout.
Job name Trigger conditions [Trigger 1] Trigger conditions [Trigger 2]
Job 1 [Value monitoring startup] [Value monitoring startup]
Job 2 [Value monitoring startup] [Value monitoring startup]
Job 3 [Handshake operation] -
Job 4 [Specified time period startup] -
Job 5 [Time specification startup] -
Job 6 [Value monitoring startup] [Value monitoring startup]
Job 7 [Handshake operation] -

App - 6
 Appendix 3 Warning Messages in Windows Vista(R)

Appendix 3.1 Overview of warning messages

In Windows Vista , a User Account Control feature has been added.

When installing/uninstalling GT Works2 or GT Designer2, or starting [DB Connection
Service Setting Tool], a warning message is displayed.

Appendix 3.2 Methods for disabling warning messages

Point
The User Account Control (UAC) is provided to protect the system from being
destroyed (e.g. prevention of start-up of a program which will execute an
unintended operation).
Before taking either of the methods described below, understand that the security
function offered by UAC will be disabled and consider the risk.

The following two methods are available for preventing warning messages.

(1) Disabling the User Account Control function

The following shows a procedure for disabling the User Account Control function.

1 Select [Start] - [Control Panel].

(To the next page)

App - 7
(From the previous page)

APPENDICES
2 Select [User Accounts].

INDEX
3 Select [User Accounts].

4 Select [Turn User Account Control on or off].

When User Account Control is enabled in
Windows Vista , the following screen appears.
Click the Continue button.

(To the next page)

App - 8
 (From the previous page)

5 Deselect [Turn on User Account Control (UAC) to

make your computer more secure].

(End)

App - 9
 (2) Method for permitting programs without any warning message

APPENDICES
The following shows a procedure for permitting programs without any warning
message.

1 Select [Start] - [Control Panel].

INDEX
2 Select [Classic View].

3 Select [Administrative Tools].

(To the next page)

App - 10
 (From the previous page)

4 Select [Local Security Policy].

When User Account Control is enabled in
Windows Vista , the following screen appears.
Click the Continue button.

5 Select [Local Policies].

6 Select [Security Options].

(To the next page)

App - 11
(From the previous page)

APPENDICES
7 Select [User Account Control: Behavior of the
elevation prompt for administrators in Admin
Approval Mode, Prompt for consent].

INDEX
8 Select [Elevate without prompting] on the [Local
Security Setting] tab, and click the OK button.

(End)

App - 12
 Appendix 4 Tables for Used Terms

In GT Designer2, some different terms are used for the same meaning on the MES
interface function setting screen and other setting screens.
They are listed in the tables shown below.

(1) In the case of Device tag settings

MES interface function setting Others

Signed Decimal (Data length: 16 bits)
Single word Signed BIN
Signed BIN16
Signed Decimal (Data length: 32 bits)
Double word
Signed BIN32
Real number Real
String ASCII Display
bytes Digits

(2) In the case of Job settings

MES interface function setting Others

Specified time period startup Sampling
Rise
Value monitoring startup
Fall
= ==
!=
<- =
Variable temporary works

App - 13
Appendix 5 Application Example of MES Interface Function

APPENDICES
The following is an example of the system where the MES interface function is used.
Example) A system where manufacturing information is collected in a GOT and managed
in a database
In the company-wide integrated system in which parts acceptance, manufacturing
processing, assembly, shipment, and inventory control are managed, information of the
actual performance is managed in a database using the MES interface function.
A process line control PLC handles information on process line (equipment) stop, running
time, down time, quantity of production, and the number of rejected products.

INDEX
On the GOT, the status of each process line is displayed, allowing control by operators.
By the MES interface function, the termination time of the process line, regularly-checked
operation rate, and fraction defective information are managed.
The system configuration is illustrated below.

Database

<Server computer>
IP address: 192.168.11.1

Ethernet

<GOT>
IP address: 192.168.11.101

Engineering process

Process line

App - 14
 (1) Setup on the server computer (database)
The actual performance for every 5 seconds, and fraction defective and operation rate
for every hour are managed using the database.

(a) Table setting

• Table name: PROCESS
• Field:

Name Data type Size Scale NULL Default

DATETIME CHAR 32 Possible
PERFORMANCE NUMBER 10 0 Possible
REJECT NUMBER 10 1 Possible
WORKINGRATE NUMBER 10 1 Possible

• ODBC setting
ODBC data source name: PROCESS
Driver: OracleHome2
TNS service name: PROCESS
• DB Connection Service setting
Service port No.: 5112
Timeout: 10 seconds

(2) Setup on the configuration computer (GT Designer2)

(a) IP address setting
• Communication Settings
Extend I/F-1: 1
CH No.: *
Driver: Ethernet Download
• Detailed setting
IP address: 192.168.11.101
Ethernet Download: 5014
Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

(b) Script

No. Trigger Operation Remarks

[w:GD540]=[w:D540]; M101: Operation stop flag
1 During M101=ON [w:GD542]=[w:D542]; D540: Operation time
[b:M101]=0; D542: Accumulated down time
[w:GD544]=[w:D544]; M102: Completion notification
[w:GD546]=[w:D546]; (The GOT collects PLC
2 When M102 rises
[b:GB102]=[b:M102]; information upon completion of
[b:M102]=0; the processing.)

(c) Screen design

For how to create the screens, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

App - 15
 (d) MES interface setting
• Device tag settings

APPENDICES
Device tag name Sampling cycle Component name Data type Device
Operation time Single word GD540
Accumulated down
Single word GD542
time
Normal sampling 5 seconds Performance Single word GD544
Rejected Single word GD546
Fraction defective Real number GD548
WorkingRate Real number GD550

INDEX
Sync. trigger 5 seconds Stop flag Bit GB101

• Server service settings

Service name Type IP address/Port No.

DBServer Database server 192.168.11.1

• Job settings

Job name Trigger Processing Remarks

Startup Startup • Initializing tags
Value monitoring • Inserting the time and performance Calculation of the
Status report
GB102=ON data into the database (DBServer) operation rate
• Calculating fraction defective from the
actual performance and the number of
rejected products • Temporary variables
Specified time • Calculating the operation rate from the F_DEFECT:
Regular report period operation time and the accumulated Fraction defective
1 hour down time OPERAT_R:
• Inserting the time, operation rate and Operation rate
fraction defective into the database
(DBServer)

(3) Operation results

The operation results (database data) of the above system are as follows:

DATETIME PERFORMANCE REJECT WORKINGRATE

2006/3/2 10:12:01 1
2006/3/2 10:24:32 2
2006/3/2 10:53:17 3
2006/3/2 11:00:00 0 87.35
2006/3/2 11:05:42 4
2006/3/2 11:17:31 5
: : : :

App - 16
 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by MES Interface Function Ver-
sion Upgrade

(1) Added function

The following describes the function added by the MES interface function.

GT Designer2
Item Description OS version
version
Option OS
Allows to not collect device data. 2.47Z MES Interface
[03.02.**]
Tag function
Option OS
Allows to set the array setting for tags. 2.73B MES Interface
[03.09.**]
Option OS
Oracle 8i, MSDE2000, Access2000, and Access2003 are 2.47Z MES Interface
added as available database. [03.02.**]
Option OS
SQL text transmission Industrial SQL Server 9.0 and Microsoft SQL Server 2005 are 2.58L MES Interface
added as an applicable database. [03.03.**]
Option OS
Access 2007 is added as an applicable database. 2.82L MES Interface
[03.13.**]
Option OS
Buffers the trigger activated during execution of a job, and
Trigger buffering function 2.47Z MES Interface
execute the action with the buffered data.
[03.02.**]
Option OS
Resource data send
Sends the resource data collected in the GOT to the database. 2.82L MES Interface
function
[03.13.**]
Option OS
Applicable model GT16, GT16-MESB 2.90U MES Interface
[04.02.**]

App - 17
App - 18
INDEX APPENDICES
INDEX
[A] [J]
Access log ............................................. 7-3,7-18,7-23 Job ................................................ A-15,5-1,6-21,6-42
Account................................................................ A-15 Job cancellation ................................................... 6-39
Action...........................................................A-15,6-42
Application server computer ................................ A-15 [M]
Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)
MES .....................................................................A-15
..................................................................... 5-10,6-68
MES interface function setting ............................... 6-1
Monitoring interval timeout...........................3-7,App-4
[C]
String ................................................................... 6-13 [O]
COMMIT .............................................................. A-15
ODBC ..................................................... A-15,7-2,7-4
Component setting .............................................. 6-11
One-shot execution.............................................. 6-40
Configuration computer ....................................... A-15
Operating environment .......................................... 2-8
Constant ...................................................... 6-56,6-70
Configuration computer ...................................... 2-8
Server computer (SNTP server computer)......... 2-9
[D] Operations using the Edit items tree...................... 6-3
DB buffering......................................................... A-16 Adding an item ................................................... 6-3
Clear processing ...................................... 6-90,6-98 Deleting an item ................................................. 6-4
Function ........................................................... 5-15 Replicating an item............................................. 6-4
Manual resend processing ....................... 6-89,6-98 Selecting an item................................................ 6-3
Operation ......................................................... 6-98 Option OS (MES interface) .................................... 1-7
Setting ...................................................... 6-38,6-88 Option setting....................................................... 6-85
DB Connection Service ................................... 1-7,7-1
DB Connection Service Setting Tool ....... 1-7,7-1,7-15 [P]
DB interface function ....................................... 3-4,5-1
Performance specifications.................................... 3-1
DB server function ................................................. 3-4
Program execution function ...................5-14,6-35,7-3
Device tag (Tag) ......................................A-16,5-3,6-6
Diagnosis ............................................................. 6-92
Operation ......................................................... 6-94 [R]
Status (MES interface function) ....................... 6-93 Record .................................................................A-16
Change job status ............................................ 6-95 Resource data send function (Resource data send
Connection result of previous job execution .... 6-97 action) .......................................................... 5-11,6-72
DB buffering operation ..................................... 6-98 Rollback ...............................................................A-16
Diagnostics ............................................................ 3-4
[S]
[F] Select/Update conditions ..................................... 6-58
Field ..................................................................... A-16 Server computer ..................................................A-15
Function list and setting item list............................ 3-4 Server service ......................................................A-15
List of setting items of DB Connection Service Setting items in Array setting ................................. 6-9
Setting Tool ........................................................ 3-5 Setting ODBC of a database ................................. 7-4
List of the MES interface setting items............... 3-5 Setting tab.............................................................. 6-5
MES interface function list.................................. 3-4 Device tag settings ............................................. 6-6
Job settings ...................................................... 6-21
[G] Job settings - Actions ....................................... 6-42
Server service settings ..................................... 6-17
GOT internal device......................................... 3-3,3-6
SNTP ...........................................................A-15,6-86
SNTP server computer ........................................A-15
[H] SNTP time synchronization function .................... 5-23
Handshake ..................................................A-16,6-33 SQL......................................................................A-15
SQL failure log .......................................7-3,7-19,7-25
[I] SQL text transmission (Communication action)
....................................................................... 5-9,6-46
IP filter ........................................................... 7-3,7-17
Insert ................................................................ 6-51
MultiSelect........................................................ 6-53
Select ............................................................... 6-49

Index - 1
 Update ............................................................. 6-50
Statistical processing........................................... 6-14

[T]

APPENDICES
Tag component (Component).............................. A-16
Tag for Wonderware Historian............................. A-15
Tag function............................................... 3-4,5-3,6-6
Test mode............................................................ 6-25
Time zone....................................................A-16,6-86
Transaction.......................................................... A-16
Trigger buffering .................................................. A-16
Function ....................................................... 3-4,5-6
Settings ............................................................ 6-26
Trigger conditions ........................................A-16,6-26

INDEX
Trigger monitoring function.............................. 3-4,5-4

[V]
Variable (Temporary variable) .............A-16,6-57,6-70

[W]
Working log........................................................ 6-100
Working log tab
Job Execute Log ............................................ 6-102
MESInterface Execute Log ............................ 6-101

Index - 2
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co., Ltd. in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

SH(NA)-080654ENG-I